(SUBDIR): Remove leim.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
1e7db2e9 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15
75d80cc6 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1 7
05197f40 8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
889be0a1
DL
11See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
12fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
13charsets in this release.
14
f4988be7
GM
15** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
16
424d8b44
DL
17** Support for LynxOS has been added.
18
1fa28578
GM
19** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
20the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
21
22** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
23images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
24to list them.
6344985d 25
d5483ab1 26** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 27Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
28
29** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
30Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
31
32** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 33support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
34maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
35build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
36necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 37
d9c9b920
DL
38** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
39new display features described below.
40
e90813b8 41** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 42all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
43lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
44"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
45description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 46
05197f40 47\f
1fa28578
GM
48* Changes in Emacs 21.1
49
1e7db2e9
GM
50** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
51
52The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
53Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
54oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
55of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
56the text.
57
58** Emacs has a new face implementation.
59
60The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
61font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
62height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
63These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
64specify a font.
65
66Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
67These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
68under Lisp changes, below.
69
70** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
71
72Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
73Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
74the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
75italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
76Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
77attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
78on terminals.
79
80The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
81supported on character terminals.
82
83** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
84
85+++
86** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
87
88If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
89longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
90is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
91minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
92
93- User option: max-mini-window-height
94
95Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
96fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
97specifies a number of lines.
98
99Default is 0.25.
100
101- User option: resize-mini-windows
102
103How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
104resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
105grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
106again.
107
108Default is `grow-only'.
109
110** LessTif support.
111
112Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
113<http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92 or later.
114
115** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
116
117When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
118from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
119non-nil.
120
121** Toolkit scroll bars.
122
123Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
124LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
125configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
126bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
127bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
128Emacs.
129
130When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
131Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
132Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
133Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
134define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
135`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
136
137Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
138a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
139directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
140different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
141system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
142add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
143
144The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
145`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
146This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
147image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
148Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
149
150+++
151** Automatic Hscrolling
152
153Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
154`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
155customized.
156
157If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
158scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
159for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
160the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
161to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
162
163+++
164** Tool bar support.
165
166Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
167of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
168changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
169displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
170if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
171icons will be used.
172
173To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
174for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
2018166d 175also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually.
1e7db2e9
GM
176
177+++
178** Tooltips.
179
180Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
181mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
182turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
183
184Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
185variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
186the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
187tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
188
189+++
190** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
191of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
192solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
193`show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
194cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
2018166d 195non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
1e7db2e9
GM
196
197** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
198truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
199foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
200customizing face `fringe'.
201
202** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
203You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
204In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
205appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
206occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
207the window to be partially obscured.)
208
209The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
210versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
211and its use is deprecated.
212
213+++
214** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
215
6b9572dc
EZ
216Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
217systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
218mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
219mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
220displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
221have enabled one.
1e7db2e9
GM
222
223Currently, the following actions have been defined:
224
225- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
226buffers.
227
228- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
229M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
230
231- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
232
233- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
234`*') toggles the status.
235
236- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
237
238+++
239** Hourglass pointer
240
241Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
242turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
243
244+++
245** Blinking cursor
246
247M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
248terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
249and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
250the group `cursor'.
251
252+++
253** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
254
255This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
256generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
257See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
258details.
259
260Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
261have to do anything to activate it.
262
263+++
264** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
265changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
266buffer by default.
267
268** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
269current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
270beginning and end of the buffer.
271
272** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
273recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
274signaled.
275
276** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
277file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
278
279+++
280** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
281compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
282this behavior.
283
284The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
285compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
286Emacs dump core.
287
288** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
289
290When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
291widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
292Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
293
294** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
295more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
296now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
297
298** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
299using that menu.
300
301+++
302** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
303
304When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
305whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
306defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
307highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
308displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
309whitespace.
310
311+++
312** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
313all frames except the selected one.
314
315** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
316let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
317
318+++
319** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
320MS-DOS version of Emacs.
321
322** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
323header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
324so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
325This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
326`Info-use-header-line'.
327
328+++
329** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
330mode `iswitchb-mode'.
331
332+++
333** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
334If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
335`(msb-mode 1)'.
336
337** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
338have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
339`de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
340
341** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
342
343** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
344`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
345`fr-drdref.tex'.
346
347+++
348** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
349displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
350menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
351menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
352
353** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
354a version-dependent component.
355
356** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
357let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
358
359On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
360according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
361key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
362option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
363delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward.
364
365If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
366a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
367Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
368`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
369the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
370have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
371
372Programmatically, you can call function
373delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
374key.
375
376+++
377** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
378point in a pop-up window.
379
380+++
381** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
382under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
383customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
384
385The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
386determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
387
388+++
389** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
390sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
391(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
392You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
393
394+++
395** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
396
397** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
398been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
399
1ff243e2
EZ
400+++
401** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
402This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
403MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
404before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
405
fba448c1
DL
406** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
407group.
408
75d80cc6 409** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
a431bf24
GM
410behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
411are recognized:
412
413`untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
414`hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
415`all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
416nil -- just delete one character.
417
b863a173
GM
418Default value is `untabify'.
419
a431bf24 420[This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
75d80cc6 421
8416e94a
DL
422** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
423symbol, not double-quoted.
424
2a64f8c2 425** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
426version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
427rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
428lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 429
22adbe54
DL
430+++
431** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
432system for keyboard input.
433
eb1b0c74
GM
434+++
435** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
436to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
437
7495f7ca
EZ
438+++
439** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
440as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
441with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
442example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
443middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
444
c607d53d 445** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 446trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
447this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
448
4104194e 449** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
1e36ff68
DL
450be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
451non-nil.
4104194e 452
c6f01e00
MB
453** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
454To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
455`auto-compression-mode' command.
456
4c724b32
DL
457** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
458`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
459
b856f39c 460+++
068127d6
GM
461** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
462operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
463
8ac08dea 464+++
62c273d7
DL
465** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
466is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
467
8ac08dea 468+++
f393cf90
DL
469** Gnus changes.
470
471The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
472four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
473internationalization and mail-fetching.
474
475*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
476many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
477
478If you used procmail like in
479
480(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
481(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
482(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
483(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
484
327652be 485this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
486
487(setq mail-sources
488 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
489 :suffix ".in")))
490
491More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
492Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
493
494*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
495Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
496Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
497longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
498
657706fa
DL
499The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
500use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
501installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 502
60dd7e0e 503*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
504parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
505are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
506now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
507
508*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
509called to position point.
510
511*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
512summary buffers and NOV files.
513
514*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
515of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
516
517*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
518subtly different manner.
519
520*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
521and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
522ever-changing layouts.
523
524*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
525
72190b84 526*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90 527
889be0a1 528+++
f393cf90 529** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
5308859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
531more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
532empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
533window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
534on.
535
ba9eeda1
GM
536** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
537set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
538file that is already visited under a different name.
539
42ac0ae5
GM
540** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
541nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
542
ba9eeda1 543** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
544support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
545use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
546buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
547M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
548new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
549
b941a14b 550+++
ba9eeda1 551** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 552and displays information about that.
b941a14b 553
25ad1371
GM
554** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
555expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
556
557This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
558determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
559mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
560interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
561regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
562associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
563
40e857ea 564** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 565suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 566
beb2eb00 567+++
c08398de
DL
568** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
569buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
570contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
571by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
572insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
573the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
574Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
575
db7a3ede 576+++
3d6cd763
GM
577** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
578coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
579escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
580such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
581recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 582always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 583read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
584(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
585RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 586
0b8a3a6d
DL
587** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
588environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
589
6d35b49f 590+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
591** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
592displays all characters in that character set.
593
594** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
595coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
596
a4067978 597+++
5cb6a58e 598** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 599on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
600defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
601commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 602
424d8b44 603+++
5898e075
DL
604** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
605`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
606indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
607indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
608
424d8b44 609+++
cc181e95
GM
610** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
611on the display using several methods
612
424d8b44 613+++
cc181e95
GM
614- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
615a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
616be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
617
424d8b44 618+++
cc181e95 619- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 620equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 621
da4496b6 622- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
623
624- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
625the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
626
424d8b44 627+++
3b4fa1b2 628** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 629an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 630command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 631does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 632
424d8b44 633+++
176256a1 634** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
635`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
636typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 637
dd0add8e
DL
638** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
639characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
640
424d8b44 641+++
699238d9 642** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 643
7233c5bd
GM
644*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
645whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
646is useful for debugging X problems.
647
648Example:
649
699238d9 650 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 651
100b3cbb
GM
652*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
653visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
654the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
655and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
656visual class names are
657
658 TrueColor
659 PseudoColor
660 DirectColor
661 StaticColor
662 GrayScale
663 StaticGray
664
665Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
666`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
667meaning.
668
669The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
670supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
671`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
672visual.
673
674Example:
675
699238d9 676 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
677
678*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
679specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
680default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
681resource values are `true' or `on'.
682
683Example:
684
699238d9 685 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 686
424d8b44 687+++
31047e0d
DL
688** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
689
3261c1d8
DL
690** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
691to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
692
ffe36136 693** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
694the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
695MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
696displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
697
559cee90
DL
698** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
699read mail from the menu etc.
700
480b5773 701+++
271b4185
GM
702** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
703a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
704
0daee095
GM
705** Changes in Texinfo mode.
706
a5e350c9 707*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
708macros
709
710 Key binding Macro
711 -------------------------
712 C-c C-c C-s @strong
713 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 714 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 715 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 716 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
717 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
718 M-RET @item
719
720*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 721
559cee90
DL
722** Changes in Outline mode.
723
724There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
725`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
726the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
727
327652be 728** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 729
c0a8c108
EZ
730+++
731*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
732with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
733are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
734Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
735buffers to kill, as before.
736
737Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 738i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
739this way.
740
956777b3
GM
741** Changes to Show Paren mode.
742
743*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
744The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
745use. Default is 1000.
746
f6989277 747+++
404fa7d6
DL
748** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
749groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
750
424d8b44
DL
751+++
752** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
753M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
754M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
755buffers.
8964fec7 756
d35fce81
GM
757** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
758abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
759`directory-abbrev-alist'.
760
a933dad1
DL
761** Faces and frame parameters.
762
763There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
764Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
765`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
766`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
767sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
768for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
769parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
770
771Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
772`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 773`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
774`default' face and vice versa.
775
d80061fa 776+++
f77a4a8a
GM
777** New face `menu'.
778
779The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
780Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
781attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
782
424d8b44 783+++
a933dad1
DL
784** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
785
786The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
787colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
788correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
789the screen gamma of a frame's display.
790
791PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
792in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
793color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
794
795The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
796`ScreenGamma'.
797
a933dad1
DL
798** Tabs and variable-width text.
799
800Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
801defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
802independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
803Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
804
805** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
806
424d8b44 807+++
a933dad1
DL
808*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
809
810 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
811
79dd1637
RS
812The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
813LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 814
79dd1637
RS
815*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
816LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 817
a933dad1
DL
818** Sound support
819
2f516940 820Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 821driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 822supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 823
424d8b44 824+++
a933dad1
DL
825** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
826the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
827forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
828value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
829users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
830even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
831
832The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
833
0e18b431 834+++
a933dad1
DL
835** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
836
837As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
838drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
839`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
840
fdd8bb68 841+++
a933dad1
DL
842** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
843bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
844
845This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
846`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
847variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
848
c5d00c64 849+++
a933dad1
DL
850** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
851
852When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 853value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 854number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 855fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
856
857When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
8a33023e 858value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 859number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 860fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
861
862** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
863notably at the end of lines.
864
865All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
866spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
867
424d8b44 868+++
eee54b0e
DL
869There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
870
2ce72bfa
EZ
871** `C-x r t' (string-rectangle) no longer deletes the existing
872rectangle contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
873The `replace-rectangle' command can be used if deletion is required.
874
a933dad1
DL
875** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
876query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
877after each match to get the replacement text.
878
00782214 879+++
d5483ab1
GM
880** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
881you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 882
424d8b44 883** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
884you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
885lisp-complete-symbol.
886
2f72fd2f
GM
887** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
888
0d43b60d
GM
889** Changes to hideshow.el
890
0d43b60d
GM
891*** Generalized block selection and traversal
892
889be0a1
DL
893A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
894and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
895serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
896See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
897
898*** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
899hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
900be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
901the open block.
902
903*** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
904function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
905the normal block-hiding function.
906
907*** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
908
909*** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
ed368846
TTN
910roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
911for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
912for `hs-minor-mode'.
327652be 913
559cee90
DL
914** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
915
424d8b44 916+++
1b24b888
GM
917*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
918an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
919log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
920
424d8b44 921+++
1b24b888
GM
922**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
923current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
924
925+++
1b24b888
GM
926*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
927in a log file.
eb2aac9d 928
502004be 929+++
1b24b888
GM
930*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
931entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
2018166d 932Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44 933version number is performed based on regular expressions from
8a33023e 934`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
424d8b44 935Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 936
2c63c979 937*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 938
79c78e77
GM
939** Changes to cmuscheme
940
941*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
942`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
943
3476b54a
GM
944** Changes in Font Lock
945
946*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 947font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 948
8a33023e 949*** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
2be6ecc6 950set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
2c63c979 951
a5e350c9
SM
952*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
953the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 954
601e0081
SM
955*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
956Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
957
b3b98592
GM
958** Comint (subshell) changes
959
988cded7
MB
960These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
961include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
962
963*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
964to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
965parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
966user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
967this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
968respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
969feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
970`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
971
972*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
973and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
974
988cded7 975*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
976buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
977buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
978
979The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
980M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
981the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
982
988cded7
MB
983*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
984and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
985see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 986
988cded7 987*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
988saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
989argument, it appends to the file.
990
988cded7 991*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
992(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
993compatibility.
994
0e40b809
EL
995*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
996ring (history).
d648cc45 997
fe5d5d8c 998*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
999identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1000strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1001
e26cec67
GM
1002** Changes to Rmail mode
1003
b97cd2cc 1004*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
f3780fe4 1005set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
c0510d27
GM
1006receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1007recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1008`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1009as correspondent.
1010
1011Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1012mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1013regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1014
3b55acc9
GM
1015*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1016to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1017Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1018with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1019for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1020
6a1950ec
GM
1021*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1022like `j'.
1023
5bb6f079
RS
1024*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1025specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1026digest message.
e26cec67 1027
993d8b7d
DL
1028*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1029in which folder to put messages automatically.
1030
4ddb57b2
EZ
1031*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1032with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1033due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1034
400a1ed0
GM
1035** Changes to TeX mode
1036
a5e350c9 1037*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1038`latex-mode'.
1039
a5e350c9
SM
1040*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1041
1042*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1043
1044*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1045
a933dad1
DL
1046** Changes to RefTeX mode
1047
1048*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1049 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1050 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1051 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1052 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1053 can be edited from that buffer.
1054
1055*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1056 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1057 `A' to use all marked entries).
1058
1059*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1060 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1061
1062*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1063 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1064 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1065 been cited.
1066
38de9631
GM
1067** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1068The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1069semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1070in column 1 are always made leaves.
1071
a933dad1
DL
1072** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1073has the following new features:
1074
1075*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1076may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1077to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1078time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1079
1080*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1081feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1082file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1083compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1084pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1085defaults to 1.
1086
5d94f558 1087** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1088file names.
1089
424d8b44 1090+++
a933dad1
DL
1091** Customize changes
1092
1093*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
2018166d
DL
1094`State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
1095M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
1096customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
1097earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1098
1099*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1100Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1101default).
1102
1103** New features in evaluation commands
1104
5e03eb84 1105*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1106modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1107print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1108customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1109eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1110
5e03eb84
GM
1111*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1112code when called with a prefix argument.
1113
ead53494
GM
1114** Ispell changes
1115
37d8a691 1116+++
bbe15990
EZ
1117*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1118transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1119spell-checks the current buffer.
1120
37d8a691 1121+++
385ff9e3
GM
1122*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1123added.
1124
1125*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1126correction is made and re-checked.
1127
1e7db2e9 1128*** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1129
1130*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1131cases.
1132
1133*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1134on syntax errors.
1135
1136*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1137end of the buffer.
1138
a933dad1
DL
1139** Dired changes
1140
1141*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1142command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1143is, delete only empty directories.
1144
1145*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1146command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1147copy directories recursively.
1148
f6737cde
GM
1149*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1150in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1151the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1152
2f72fd2f
GM
1153*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1154replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1155directory.
1156
7381ae05
MB
1157*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1158a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1159This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1160will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1161accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1162
e024b101
GM
1163*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1164from ls switches.
1165
60b392a7
MB
1166*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1167of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1168which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1169source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1170
a933dad1
DL
1171** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1172use the -f option when sending mail.
1173
b1c609b1
GM
1174** CC mode changes.
1175
1176Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1177current user setups (although it's believed that these
1178incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1179However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1180back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1181compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1182release.
1183
e120bebf
GM
1184*** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
1185CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
1186is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
1187confusion.
1188
1189However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
1190default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
1191java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
1192notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
1193
1194*** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
1195Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
1196
1197space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
1198parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
1199
1200compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
1201parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
1202It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
1203style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
1204
1205*** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
1206Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
1207"electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
1208earlier statement. An example:
1209
1210for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1211 if (a[i])
1212 res += a[i]->offset;
1213else
1214
1215Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
1216continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
1217the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
1218possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
1219the preceding "if".
1220
1221CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
1222by default.
1223
1224*** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
1225Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
1226meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
1227documentation or other natural language text.
1228
1229The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
1230contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
1231the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
1232strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
1233to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
1234commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
1235sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
1236
1237*** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
1238Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
1239source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
1240comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
1241
1242*** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
1243When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
1244line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
1245change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
1246Pike mode only.
1247
1248*** Better handling of syntactic errors.
1249The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
1250improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
1251stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
1252following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
1253matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
1254indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
1255is reported afterwards.
1256
1257*** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
1258A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
1259returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
1260
1261*** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
1262Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
1263on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
1264can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
1265code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
1266modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
1267groundwork.
1268
7972fcfc
GM
1269*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1270This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1271of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1272non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1273want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1274have to bother.
1275
1276Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1277situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1278and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1279If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1280the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1281by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1282
b1c609b1
GM
1283*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1284When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1285variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1286take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1287is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1288settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1289possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1290Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1291
1292By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1293special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1294the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1295of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1296above.
1297
1298Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1299when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1300function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1301call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1302then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1303values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1304only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1305function documentation for more info.
1306
1307The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1308especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1309with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1310intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1311such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1312is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1313configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1314global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1315
1316(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1317
1318**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1319This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1320
1321This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1322variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1323completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1324the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1325empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1326style system.
1327
1328**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1329In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1330c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1331as far as possible.
1332
1333*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1334CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1335surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1336chapter about this in the manual.
1337
1338**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1339The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1340recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1341primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1342adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1343
1344**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1345This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1346c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1347
1348**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1349This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1350
1351It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1352Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1353A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1354inside CC Mode.
1355
1356Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1357causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1358the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1359available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1360cc-mode/).
1361
1362**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1363The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1364specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1365literals.
1366
1367**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1368It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1369prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1370you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1371this function.
1372
1373*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1374It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1375to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1376struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1377Thanks to Eric Eide.
1378
1379*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1380It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1381opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1382
1383**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1384
1385*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1386See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1387better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1388and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1389
1390*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1391previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1392the column specified by comment-column.
1393
1394*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1395In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1396is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1397prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1398contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1399don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1400
1401*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1402instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1403arguments.
1404
1405*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1406
1407*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1408c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1409c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1410variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1411Provan).
1412
1413*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1414
c407c570
GM
1415** Makefile mode changes
1416
1417*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1418
5d94f558 1419*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1420Fontlock mode is active.
1421
87be76f6
GM
1422** Isearch changes
1423
3353ef5a
GM
1424*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1425so that searches can be resumed.
1426
1427*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1428respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1429that started the search.
1430
87be76f6 1431*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1432selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1433
c8a8458a 1434+++
87be76f6
GM
1435*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1436
d35fce81 1437Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1438`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1439search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1440before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1441highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1442`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1443
1444The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1445will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1446Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1447using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1448usual snappy response.
1449
1450If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1451matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1452set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1453isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1454
21bc6203 1455+++
35384f06
GM
1456** Changes in sort.el
1457
1458The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1459as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1460new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1461numeric base.
87be76f6 1462
d7b511c4
GM
1463** Changes to Ange-ftp
1464
424d8b44 1465+++
d7b511c4 1466*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1467names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1468sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1469
d7b511c4
GM
1470*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1471ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1472
9d453139
SS
1473*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1474output ^M at the end of lines.
1475
4b9347b3
GM
1476** Shell script mode changes.
1477
1478Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
8a33023e 1479derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
4b9347b3
GM
1480sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1481
79214ddf
FP
1482** Etags changes.
1483
1484*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1485
aca0be23 1486*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1487possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1488{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1489This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1490a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1491
79214ddf
FP
1492*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1493declarations when given the --declarations option.
1494
1495*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1496"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf 1497
8c463abe 1498*** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
10de1e33
FP
1499automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
1500`template' keywords.
8c463abe
FP
1501
1502*** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
1503C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
1504
79214ddf
FP
1505*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1506types.
1507
de370c4c 1508*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1509
1510*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1511
1512*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1513are now tagged.
1514
89d57763
FP
1515*** In makefiles, tags the targets.
1516
79214ddf
FP
1517*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1518variables are tagged.
1519
1520*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1521
8dc78b52
FP
1522*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1523for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1524
c8d94f86 1525+++
f6737cde
GM
1526** Changes in etags.el
1527
3f6e4b8b
GM
1528*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1529tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1530is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1531
f6737cde
GM
1532*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1533the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1534
1535If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1536FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1537TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1538obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1539
1540TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1541
1542FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1543List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1544
1545A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1546
1547 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1548 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1549 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1550
1551*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1552of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1553
1554*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1555names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1556
0c68ce6f
GM
1557*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1558If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1559/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
d521e087 1560"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
0c68ce6f
GM
1561point will go to the beginning of the file.
1562
1e7db2e9 1563*** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
d521e087
FP
1564auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
1565(with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
1566
1e7db2e9
GM
1567*** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
1568in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
1569found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
1570
424d8b44 1571+++
fbc164de
PE
1572** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1573and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1574LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1575
c3eb1f10 1576+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1577** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1578Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
15798859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
889be0a1
DL
1580GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
15818859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
028d739a
DL
1582There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
1583and Polish `slash'.
59c1bf85 1584
732b9cdd
GM
1585+++
1586** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
89d57763 1587These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
732b9cdd
GM
1588of the tutorial.
1589
b8b2ea31
KH
1590** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
1591function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
1592Lisp Coding Convention".
1593
1594 new command old-binding
1595 --- ------- -----------
1596 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
1597 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
1598 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
1599
1600 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
1601 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
1602 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
1603
1604 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
1605 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
1606 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
1607 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
1608 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
1609 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
1610
1e406be0
KH
1611** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
1612rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
1613typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
1614"=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
1615"`", you must type "=q".
1616
424d8b44 1617+++
163ea954 1618** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1619remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1620appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1621
1622** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1623
424d8b44 1624+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1625** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1626
6ab8d72d 1627+++
1e36ff68 1628** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1629containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1630expression from that list, are not checked.
1631
5d94f558
SS
1632** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1633When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1634and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1635the buffer, just like for the local files.
1636
dc28878c
GM
1637** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1638
df8a9f78 1639+++
95931eb1
GM
1640** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1641displays local abbrevs, only.
1642
54baed30
GM
1643** VC Changes
1644
1645VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1646easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1647Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1648to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1649changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
60a441a5 1650`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
54baed30
GM
1651version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1652each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1653file is registered in that backend.
1654
1655When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1656backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1657directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1658master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1659the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1660As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1661
1662The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1663still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1664RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1665vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1666where it doesn't make sense.)
1667
1668The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1669obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1670`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1671
1672*** General Changes
1673
1674The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1675checks are always done now.
1676
327652be 1677VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1678operations.
1679
c286608e
SM
1680`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1681`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1682`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1683
22933be8
AS
1684The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1685first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1686current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1687the working file (``merge news'').
1688
1689The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1690(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1691downwards.
1692
1693*** Multiple Backends
1694
1695VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1696useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1697repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1698commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1699local RCS archives.
1700
1701To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1702should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1703backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1704`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1705
60a441a5
AS
1706You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
1707C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
1708a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
1709if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
1710current revision number from the more remote backend.
22933be8
AS
1711
1712If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1713another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1714any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1715pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1716
1717After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1718changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1719local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1720buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1721
54baed30
GM
1722*** Changes for CVS
1723
1724There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1725default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1726remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1727by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1728regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1729that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1730queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1731
22933be8
AS
1732If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1733repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1734revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1735any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1736backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1737number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1738(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1739of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1740the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1741automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1742since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1743name.)
22933be8 1744
54baed30
GM
1745If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1746repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1747If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1748commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1749current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1750entire directory tree.
1751
1752The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1753"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1754is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1755"watched" by other developers.)
1756
22933be8
AS
1757The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1758(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
60a441a5 1759an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
22933be8
AS
1760starting at the given directory.
1761
54baed30
GM
1762*** Lisp Changes in VC
1763
1764VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1765add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1766library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1767then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
60a441a5
AS
1768a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
1769provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
54baed30 1770of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
60a441a5
AS
1771you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
1772`SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
54baed30 1773
c4ed232b 1774** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
732b9cdd
GM
1775SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1776terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1777See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1778
a933dad1
DL
1779** New modes and packages
1780
79b9f6e0
MB
1781*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1782automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1783the default is not applicable.
1784
b95b34e5
GM
1785*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1786rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1787shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1788
1789Features are:
1790
1791- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1792 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1793 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1794 | / \
1795
1796- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1797 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1798 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1799 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1800 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1801 you are drawing.
1802
1803- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1804 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1805
1806- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1807 flood-filling.
1808
1809- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1810 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1811 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1812 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1813
b95b34e5
GM
1814- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1815 also do without the mouse.
1816
1817- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1818 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1819 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1820 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1821 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1822
1823- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1824
1825 lines straight-lines
1826 rectangles squares
1827 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1828 ellipses circles
1829 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1830 spray-can setting size for spraying
1831 vaporize line vaporize lines
1832 erase characters erase rectangles
1833
1834 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1835 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1836 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1837 drawing.
1838
1839 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1840 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1841 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1842 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1843
1844- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1845 can be turned off).
1846
4473cdd9
JW
1847+++
1848*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1849implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1850It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1851functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1852history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1853will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1854the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1855rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1856all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1857
ff332647 1858+++
90cbf47e
GM
1859*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1860intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1861typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1862on certain projects.
1863
894ca69e 1864+++
baf7eee4
GM
1865*** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
1866of interactively entered regexps. For example,
abb2db1c 1867
d96d6bb0 1868 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1869
1870will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1871face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1872typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1873Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1874appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1875current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
baf7eee4
GM
1876corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
1877to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
abb2db1c 1878
424d8b44 1879+++
d96d6bb0 1880*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1881Emacs is idle.
1882
31fc5d15
GM
1883*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1884parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1885
5cb6a58e
SM
1886*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1887package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1888be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1889`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1890comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1891
424d8b44 1892+++
578979ee
GM
1893*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1894facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1895separate Texinfo file.
1896
424d8b44
DL
1897+++
1898*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1899by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1900provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1901`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
8a33023e 1902enter check-in log messages.
dc1178bf 1903
424d8b44 1904+++
6abca616
EZ
1905*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1906without invoking external programs.
1907
1908The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1909and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1910`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1911is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1912Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1913
1914The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1915page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1916
719e2c6e 1917+++
5e5dff44
GM
1918*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1919authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1920
1921The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1922the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1923the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1924Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1925even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1926single step.
1927
1928On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1929matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1930probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1931contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1932
424d8b44 1933+++
f7136ee8
GM
1934*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1935unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1936actually modifying content of a buffer.
1937
bbd9b566
GM
1938*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1939PostScript.
1940
1941Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1942
1943The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1944
1945 ; comment (until end of line)
1946 A non-terminal
1947 "C" terminal
1948 ?C? special
1949 $A default non-terminal
1950 $"C" default terminal
1951 $?C? default special
1952 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1953 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1954 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1955 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1956 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1957 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1958 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1959 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1960 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1961 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1962 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1963 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1964 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1965 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1966 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1967
1968Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1969
99453a38
GM
1970*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1971align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1972determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1973example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1974equal signs of assignments.
1975
424d8b44 1976+++
559cee90
DL
1977*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1978paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1979
424d8b44 1980+++
6448a6b3
GM
1981*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1982list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
2018166d 1983buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
6448a6b3 1984
6344985d
GM
1985*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1986
249652b1
GM
1987*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1988replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1989is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1990and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1991not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1992which answers different needs.
1993
424d8b44 1994+++
3476b54a
GM
1995*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1996suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1997expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1998course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1999reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
2000to be enabled.
2001
424d8b44 2002+++
8964fec7
SM
2003*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
2004containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
2005
424d8b44 2006+++
a933dad1
DL
2007*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
2008
424d8b44 2009+++
a933dad1
DL
2010*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
2011
2012*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
2013
fba448c1 2014Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
8901d1ac
GM
2015`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
2016disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
2017`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
2018displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
2019and background colors.
2020
a933dad1
DL
2021*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
2022Pascal) language.
2023
f6499c03 2024+++
a933dad1
DL
2025*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
2026the text at point.
2027
2028*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
2029
424d8b44 2030+++
8d54eb69
DL
2031*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
2032
732b9cdd
GM
2033*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
2034whitespace in a file.
a933dad1 2035
ebcfda83
GM
2036*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
2037files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
2038(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
2039interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
2040often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
2041uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
2042codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
2043
2044*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
2045
2046Here is an example of columns:
2047
2048horse apple bus
2049dog pineapple car EXTRA
2050porcupine strawberry airplane
2051
2052Doing the following settings:
2053
2054 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
2055 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
2056 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
2057 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
2058
2059
2060Selecting the lines above and typing:
2061
2062 M-x delimit-columns-region
2063
2064It results:
2065
2066[ horse , apple , bus , ]
2067[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
2068[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
2069
2070delim-col has the following options:
2071
2072 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
2073 before all columns.
2074
2075 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
2076 between each column.
2077
2078 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
2079 after all columns.
2080
2081 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
2082 each column.
2083
2084delim-col has the following commands:
2085
2086 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
2087 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
2088
424d8b44 2089+++
2018166d
DL
2090*** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
2091operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
2092menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
2093recent file list can be displayed:
f507826c 2094
31fc5d15 2095- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
8a33023e
GM
2096- sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
2097- showing paths relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 2098
31fc5d15
GM
2099The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2100dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 2101
8062f458
DL
2102*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2103text.
2104
424d8b44 2105+++
36e24b82 2106*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
2107of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2108specific to Message mode.
2109
424d8b44 2110+++
36e24b82
DL
2111*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2112viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2113with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2114
aaa659ef
DL
2115*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2116interface to access directory servers using different directory
2117protocols. It has a separate manual.
2118
eee54b0e
DL
2119*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2120for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2121
424d8b44 2122+++
612839b6
GM
2123*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2124
5d94f558 2125*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2126minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2127
399da7e3
DL
2128*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2129with the diary features.
2130
6e417ca5
DL
2131*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2132numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2133
4a27bdfb
GM
2134*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2135Fill mode.
2136
60dd7e0e
DL
2137*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2138Gnus facilities.
2139
dace60cf
JW
2140*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2141facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2142difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2143they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2144
965bc065
DL
2145+++
2146** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2147paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2148
2149+++
2150** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2151to be visited as images.
2152
a933dad1
DL
2153** Withdrawn packages
2154
2155*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2156functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2157
3261c1d8
DL
2158*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2159
2160*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23 2161
05197f40 2162\f
01242779
DL
2163* Incompatible Lisp changes
2164
2165There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2166may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
3b6936cc 2167See the sections below for details.
01242779 2168
89d57763 2169** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
9b2a085d 2170`(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
3b6936cc 2171Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'.
01242779
DL
2172
2173** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2174which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2175may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2176these properties are active.
2177
4dd4cc14 2178** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2179ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2180
2181** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2182buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2183make a difference to some code.
2184
4dd4cc14
DL
2185** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2186operates on the minibuffer.
2187
7c94ccf6
EZ
2188** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2189cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2190different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2191(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2192Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2193character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2194multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2195encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2196reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2197sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2198a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2199the buffer as multibyte characters.
2200
2201Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2202MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2203appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2204
7a39158f 2205** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
3280fbe8
EZ
2206`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2207`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7a39158f
DL
2208
2209** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2210long promised.
2211
f34eb373
DL
2212** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
2213extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
2214dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
2215one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
2216charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
2217the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
028d739a
DL
2218encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
2219probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
3478eafc 2220
05197f40 2221\f
ce75fd23
GM
2222* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2223(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2224
2018166d
DL
2225** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
2226between custom options. Example:
2227
2228 (defcustom default-input-method nil
2229 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
2230 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
2231 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
2232 :group 'mule
2233 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
2234 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
2235
2236This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
2237current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
2238first in a custom-set-variables statement.
2239
f3780fe4 2240** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
a758f97d
GM
2241function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2242args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2243(signal or normal termination).
2244
023045d6
DL
2245+++
2246** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2247from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2248
eb1b0c74
GM
2249+++
2250** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2251to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2252
52d89894
GM
2253+++
2254** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2255alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2256
693c4692 2257** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2258
1c14ba45 2259+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2260** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2261deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2262being deleted.
2263
1c14ba45 2264+++
39e776cd
SM
2265** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2266
a18a342d 2267+++
1396138a 2268** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2269If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2270skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2271with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2272C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2273charset.
2274
4fbdfdcf
MB
2275+++
2276** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2277the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2278message.
2279
6a0b0752
MB
2280** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2281expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2282
1c14ba45 2283+++
47e351a3
GM
2284** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2285with the more general `:mask' property.
2286
1c14ba45 2287+++
f864120f 2288** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
ba9eeda1 2289
a2bd77b8
GM
2290** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2291backslash.
2292
424d8b44
DL
2293+++
2294** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2295is running in batch mode. For example,
2296
2297 (message "%s" (read t))
2298
2299will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2300to standard output.
2301
2302+++
2303** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2304`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2305
ead53494
GM
2306** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2307will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2308frame or window.
2309
f6499c03 2310+++
27848c01
GM
2311** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2312were added
2313
2314- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2315
8a33023e 2316Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
27848c01
GM
2317a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2318
2319- Function: remq ELT LIST
2320
8a33023e 2321Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
27848c01
GM
2322comparison is done with `eq'.
2323
1c14ba45 2324+++
27848c01 2325** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2326
b548072f
GM
2327** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2328has been changed.
2329
424d8b44 2330+++
07b14857
KH
2331** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2332without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2333convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2334
1c14ba45 2335+++
9662da0b
GM
2336** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2337or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2338
7fce7efb
DL
2339** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2340function was declared obsolete.
2341
1c14ba45 2342+++
5d94f558 2343** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2344retained as an alias).
2345
f98d3086
SM
2346** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2347It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2348is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2349
87efd256
GM
2350** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2351
39b39373
GM
2352- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2353
2354Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2355omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2356the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2357even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2358minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2359means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2360
67c9a1d2
GM
2361** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2362
2363- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2364
2365Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2366
2367This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2368calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2369argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2370value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2371returned.
2372
2373Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2374if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2375it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2376minibuffer even if it is active.
2377
2378Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2379counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2380too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2381and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2382`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2383entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2384
2385ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2386ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2387ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2388ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2389ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2390If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2391Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2392
ead53494
GM
2393** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2394event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2395argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2396
25fa6deb
GM
2397** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2398call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2399message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2400Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2401
5d94f558 2402** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2403meaning no limit.
2404
5d94f558 2405** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2406coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2407DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2408
9b2999d0
DL
2409+++
2410** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2411list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2412
c286608e
SM
2413** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2414
9b2999d0 2415+++
80c05bd3
DL
2416** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2417buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2418This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2419than replacing the local map.
2420
14fd0da3
DL
2421** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2422`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2423removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2424instead.
45f485a6
GM
2425
2426** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2427
f6499c03 2428+++
c286608e
SM
2429** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2430as promised long ago.
f0298744 2431
5d94f558 2432** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
05197f40 2433\f
a933dad1
DL
2434* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2435
2436Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2437--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2438When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2439so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2440
697617d9
GM
2441*** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
2442
85c75536
MB
2443*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2444buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2445the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2446restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2447
0b8a3a6d
DL
2448*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2449`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
028d739a 2450when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
0b8a3a6d
DL
2451multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2452
2453*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2454`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2455contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2456
2457*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2458changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2459[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2460regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2461the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2462extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2463bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2464eight-bit-graphic.
2465
2466** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2467
9b2a085d 2468A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
0b8a3a6d
DL
2469a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2470character set as previously.
2471
2472*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2473They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2474modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2475
2476CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2477characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2478range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2479case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2480
2481FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
9b2a085d 2482name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2483
2484*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2485registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2486"fontset-default".
2487
2488*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2489argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2490
2491** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2492composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2493buffers and strings.
2494
2495*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2496character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2497code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2498have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2499composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2500composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2501The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2502also been deleted.
2503
2504*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2505specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2506`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2507
2508*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2509MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2510composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2511may differ between buffer and string text.
2512
2513*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2514COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2515
2516*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2517directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2518Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2519`composition' from STRING.
2520
2521*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2522a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2523
2524*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2525obsolete.
2526
889be0a1
DL
2527** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
2528the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
2529
965bc065 2530** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
1e36ff68
DL
2531`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
2532introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
2533U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2534
1e36ff68
DL
2535** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. It provides
2536limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For details, please
2537see the documentation string of this coding system.
23cfab61 2538
0b8a3a6d 2539** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1e36ff68
DL
2540`japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
2541standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2542
2543** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
2544have been introduced.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2545
2546+++
2547** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1e36ff68 2548have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
028d739a
DL
25490xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
2550eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
2551emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
2018166d
DL
2552buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
2553eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
2554must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
2555their multibyte equivalent.
0b8a3a6d 2556
399da7e3 2557+++
f0124b4a
DL
2558** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2559that offset in the file before writing.
2560
f98d3086
SM
2561** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2562compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2563
612839b6
GM
2564** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2565`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2566from which the command was issued.
2567
2568** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2569`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2570`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2571additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2572operate on.
2573
271b4185
GM
2574** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2575to `window-buffer-height'.
2576
2577- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2578
2579Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2580The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2581lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2582
2583Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2584respectively.
2585
8a33023e 2586If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
271b4185
GM
2587COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2588
2589The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2590obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2591on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2592
2593Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2594buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2595possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2596is currently displayed in some window.
2597
3c30cb6e
DL
2598** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2599argument function's results.
2600
62f20204
GM
2601** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2602signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2603
c0510d27 2604** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2605header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2606
2607** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2608ignores differences in case and text representation.
2609
2610** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2611cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2612as follows:
2613
2614 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2615 nil don't display a cursor
2616 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2617 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2618 others display a box cursor.
2619
9a0dd3dc
GM
2620** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2621an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2622defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2623set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2624
d7b511c4 2625** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2626specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2627the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2628text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2629
2630Example:
2631
2632 (string-to-syntax "()")
2633 => (4 . 41)
2634
1fa28578
GM
2635** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2636other than 10.
2637
2638*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2639INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2640
5d94f558 2641 #b1111
1fa28578 2642 => 15
5d94f558 2643 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2644 => -15
2645
2646*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2647
5d94f558 2648 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2649 => 438
2650
2651*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2652
5d94f558 2653 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2654 => 48815
2655
2656*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2657
5d94f558 2658 #2R-111
1fa28578 2659 => -7
5d94f558 2660 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2661 => 267
2662
3d4ff2dd 2663** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2664the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2665and isn't a string.
2666
3d4ff2dd
GM
2667** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2668a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2669value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2670not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2671
16ce590d
DL
2672+++
2673** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2674
73825616 2675** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2676for a regexp in a string.
2677
2678** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2679`mouse-position-function'.
2680
723e779c
GM
2681** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2682that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2683
d1e103b2
GM
2684** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2685Keywords are now always considered constants.
2686
31047e0d
DL
2687+++
2688** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2689returns it.
2690
7a85e4df
GM
2691** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2692returned by function `recent-keys'.
2693
02b14400
RS
2694+++
2695** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2696can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2697Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2698etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2699mode.
404fa7d6 2700
02b14400 2701+++
8964fec7
SM
2702** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2703and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2704
02b14400
RS
2705+++
2706** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2707has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2708function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2709returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2710been performed."
2711
2712When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2713and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2714hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2715then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2716
02b14400 2717+++
81da8b32
GM
2718** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2719In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2720and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2721
02b14400 2722+++
9e207b90
GM
2723** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2724with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2725specified table.
2726
2727 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2728
2729Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2730TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2731saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2732what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2733
02b14400 2734+++
d7f89643 2735** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2736Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8a33023e 2737Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
601e0081
SM
2738corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2739Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2740
02b14400 2741+++
dde9e75a
GM
2742** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2743removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2744
02b14400 2745+++
9da30515
GM
2746** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2747instead of being optional.
2748
02b14400 2749+++
d20679eb
GM
2750** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2751modify read-only text.
2752
fbc164de
PE
2753** New functions and variables for locales.
2754
2018166d 2755+++
fbc164de
PE
2756The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2757decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2758time functions like strftime. The new variables
2759`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2760locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2761
2762The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2763environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2764the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2765environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2766not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2767`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2768`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2769
02b14400 2770+++
863476d1
SM
2771** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2772To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2773modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2774start sequences.
2775
02b14400 2776+++
ef6d912c
GM
2777** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2778because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2779
02b14400 2780+++
a933dad1
DL
2781** New function `propertize'
2782
2783The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2784strings with text properties.
2785
2786- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2787
2788Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2789by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2790PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2791specified value of that property. Example:
2792
2793 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2794
2795+++
2796** push and pop macros.
2797
02b14400
RS
2798Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2799are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2800as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2801
2802(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2803(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2804 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2805
02b14400
RS
2806** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2807
6c7fd5aa
RS
2808Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2809are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2810
2811(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2812 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2813 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2814 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2815
2816(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2817 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2818 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2819 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2820
a933dad1 2821+++
6c083b4c
GM
2822** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2823[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2824class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2825or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2826
2827[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2828[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2829[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2830[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2831[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2832 space, and DEL.
2833[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2834 and DEL.
2835[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2836 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2837 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2838[:alpha:] matches letters.
2839 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2840 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2841[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2842[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2843[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2844[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2845 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2846 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2847[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2848[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2849[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2850
2851+++
2852** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2853
2854The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2855
2856- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2857
2858The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2859are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2860
2861:test TEST
2862
2863TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2864Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2865it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2866
2867:size SIZE
2868
2869SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2870many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2871
2872:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2873
2874REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2875full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2876size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
28771.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2878old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2879
2880:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2881
2882THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2883hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2884(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2885
2886:weakness WEAK
2887
b548072f
GM
2888WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2889`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2890`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2891collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2892outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2893
2894- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2895
2896Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2897
2898- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2899
2900Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2901
2902- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2903
2904Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2905values are shared.
2906
2907- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2908
2909Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2910
2911- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2912
2913Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2914
2915- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2916
2917Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2918
2919- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2920
2921Returns the size of TABLE.
2922
d96d6bb0 2923- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2924
2925Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2926
2927- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2928
2929Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2930
2931- Function: clrhash TABLE
2932
2933Clear TABLE.
2934
2935- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2936
2937Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2938not found.
2939
79214ddf 2940- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2941
2942Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2943another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2944
2945- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2946
2947Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2948
2949- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2950
2951Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2952arguments KEY and VALUE.
2953
2954- Function: sxhash OBJ
2955
2956Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2957
2958- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2959
2960Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2961a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2962comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2963and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2964of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2965
2966TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2967
2968HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2969code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2970integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2971
2972Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2973be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2974
2975 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2976 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2977
2978 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2979 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2980
79214ddf 2981 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2982 'case-fold-string-hash))
2983
2984 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2985
2986+++
2987** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2988
2989It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2990circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2991a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2992
2993+++
2994** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2995
2996If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2997#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2998
a933dad1
DL
2999+++
3000** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
3001t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
3002specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
3003is too short to reach that column.
3004
3005+++
3006** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
3007now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
3008after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
3009two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
3010
3011If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
3012perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
3013and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
3014
3015+++
3016** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
3017to specify which buffer to return the size of.
3018
3019+++
3020** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
3021calendar-move-hook after moving point.
3022
3023+++
3024** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
3025directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
3026small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
3027small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
3028temporary-file-directory instead.
3029
3030+++
3031** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
3032the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
3033`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
3034hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
3035
3036+++
2018166d
DL
3037** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
3038elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
a933dad1
DL
3039
3040+++
3041** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
3042
3043make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
3044creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
3045ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
3046
3047+++
3048** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
3049
3050The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
3051on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
3052is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
3053never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
3054ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
3055overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
3056
3057If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
3058that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
3059to get an error if the file exists at that time.
3060The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
3061
3062+++
3063** Function `format' now handles text properties.
3064
3065Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
3066If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
3067ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
3068result string.
3069
3070Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
3071string where arguments appear in the result string.
3072
3073Example:
3074
3075 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
3076 (s2 "world"))
3077 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
3078 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 3079 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
3080
3081results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
3082
3083+++
3084** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
3085
3086Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
3087The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
3088argument in it.
3089
3090 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
3091 (arg "world"))
3092 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
3093 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
3094 (message msg arg))
3095
3096+++
3097** Sound support
3098
3099Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
3100(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
3101
3102Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
3103(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
3104to enable sound support.
3105
3106Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
3107list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
3108when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
3109functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3110sound to play, before playing the sound.
3111
3112The following sound properties are supported:
3113
3114- `:file FILE'
3115
3116FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3117searched relative to `data-directory'.
3118
6fb40beb
GM
3119- `:data DATA'
3120
3121DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3122may be present, but not both.
3123
a933dad1
DL
3124- `:volume VOLUME'
3125
3126VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
31270..1. This property is optional.
3128
01242779
DL
3129- `:device DEVICE'
3130
3131DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3132sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3133
a933dad1
DL
3134Other properties are ignored.
3135
01242779
DL
3136An alternative interface is called as
3137(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3138
a933dad1 3139** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 3140
9b2999d0 3141+++
356673d4
DL
3142** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3143a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
3144
3145** Changes to garbage collection
3146
3147*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3148of live and free strings.
3149
3150*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3151strings that have been consed so far.
3152
05197f40 3153\f
04545643
GM
3154* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3155Lisp Manual
3156
f7eb32aa 3157+++
a299a6f0
GM
3158** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3159mini-windows.
3160
9b2999d0 3161+++
26fcde61
MB
3162** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3163argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3164returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3165
a299a6f0 3166** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3167
9a8d84ca
DL
3168+++
3169** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3170
9b2999d0 3171+++
2c69ced2
GM
3172** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3173image.
3174
3175- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3176
3177Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3178
3179SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3180measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3181character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3182font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3183FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3184
9b2999d0 3185+++
ebb8f116
GM
3186** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3187has a mask bitmap.
3188
3189- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3190
3191Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3192FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3193or omitted means use the selected frame.
3194
f6499c03 3195+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3196** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3197satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3198
3199+++
3200** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3201optional.
3202
f6499c03
DL
3203+++
3204** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3205below).
04545643 3206
05197f40 3207\f
a933dad1
DL
3208* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3209
3210Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3211--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3212When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3213so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3214
f6d3257b
GM
3215** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3216to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3217
3218Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3219text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3220is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3221your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3222laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3223just display it black instead.
3224
3225This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3226a line like
3227
3228 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3229
3230in your `.emacs'.
3231
a933dad1
DL
3232** New face implementation.
3233
3234Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3235font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3236
3237+++
3238*** New faces.
3239
3240Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3241
3242 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3243
a933dad1
DL
3244 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3245 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3246
a933dad1 3247 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3248
a933dad1 3249 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3250
a933dad1 3251 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3252
a933dad1 3253 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3254
a933dad1
DL
3255 7. Background color.
3256
3257 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3258
3259 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3260
3261 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3262
3263 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3264
3265 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3266 color.
3267
3268 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3269 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3270
3271Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3272same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3273frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3274faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
0969bd6a 3275with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
a933dad1
DL
3276attributes mentioned above.
3277
3278There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3279definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3280created frames.
79214ddf 3281
a933dad1
DL
3282A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3283have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3284`fully-specified'.
3285
3286+++
3287*** Face merging.
3288
3289The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3290combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3291aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3292properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3293that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3294results in a fully-specified face.
3295
3296+++
3297*** Face realization.
3298
3299After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3300merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3301realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3302available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3303face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3304cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3305
3306Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3307character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3308for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3309charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3310
3311Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3312specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3313being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3314the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3315statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3316
3317In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3318`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
33190x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3320the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3321initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3322Emacs.
3323
3324Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3325`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3326registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3327with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3328
a7c13351 3329+++
a933dad1
DL
3330**** Clearing face caches.
3331
3332The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3333on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3334unused fonts.
3335
3336+++
3337*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3338
a933dad1
DL
3339Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3340given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3341for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3342
3343If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3344pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3345family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3346property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3347an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3348
3349Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3350against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3351match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3352
3353Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3354
3355The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3356attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3357face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3358names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3359that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3360width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3361to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3362
52d89894
GM
3363Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3364alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
89d57763 3365doesn't exist.
af4bb4c8
KH
3366
3367Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
8a33023e 3368all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
af4bb4c8
KH
3369registry.
3370
8a33023e 3371Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
af4bb4c8
KH
3372slightly different.
3373
3374Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3375
a933dad1
DL
3376
3377+++
3378**** Scalable fonts
3379
3380Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3381since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3382servers.
3383
3384To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3385`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3386scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3387Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3388scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3389that list. Example:
3390
3391 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3392
3393allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3394
3395+++
3396*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3397
3398- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3399
3400Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3401is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3402string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3403
3404If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3405the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3406FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3407POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3408SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3409These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3410if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3411REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3412the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3413of the face font sort order.
3414
79214ddf 3415- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3416
3417Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3418omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3419(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3420non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3421
3422- Variable: font-list-limit
3423
3424Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3425won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3426matching font. The default is currently 100.
3427
3428+++
3429*** Setting face attributes.
3430
3431For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3432with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3433implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3434`face-attribute'.
3435
3436Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3437symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3438
3439The following attributes are recognized:
3440
3441`:family'
3442
3443VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3444or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3445and `?' are allowed.
3446
3447`:width'
3448
3449VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3450It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3451`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3452`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3453
3454`:height'
3455
787345ff
MB
3456VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3457in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3458scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3459height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3460
3461`:weight'
3462
3463VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3464symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3465`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3466
3467`:slant'
3468
3469VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3470symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3471`reverse-oblique'.
3472
3473`:foreground', `:background'
3474
3475VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3476
3477`:underline'
3478
3479VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3480VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3481a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3482don't underline.
3483
3484`:overline'
3485
3486VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3487VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3488string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3489overline.
3490
3491`:strike-through'
3492
3493VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3494striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3495face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3496is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3497
3498`:box'
3499
3500VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3501around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3502VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3503of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3504and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3505VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3506:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3507the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3508specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3509defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3510the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3511color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3512should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3513like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3514that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3515the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3516box.
3517
3518`:inverse-video'
3519
3520VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3521inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3522
3523`:stipple'
3524
3525If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3526The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3527searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3528HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3529is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3530explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3531
3532For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3533and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3534
3535`:font'
3536
3537Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3538XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3539is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3540versions of Emacs.
3541
3542For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3543be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3544must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3545
3546Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3547`defface'.
3548
787345ff
MB
3549`:inherit'
3550
3551VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3552of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3553like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3554
a933dad1
DL
3555*** Face attributes and X resources
3556
3557The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3558from X resources:
3559
3560 Face attribute X resource class
3561-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3562 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3563 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3564 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3565 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3566 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3567 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3568 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3569 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3570 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3571 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3572 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3573 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3574 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3575 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3576 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3577 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3578 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3579 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3580 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3581
3582+++
3583*** Text property `face'.
3584
3585The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3586specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3587specification can be
3588
35891. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3590
35912. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3592 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3593 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3594 for face attribute names.
3595
35963. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3597 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3598 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3599
3600+++
3601** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3602
acf3ecb7
EZ
3603The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3604on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3605the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3606default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3607`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3608used to clear the mapping table.
3609
acf3ecb7
EZ
3610** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3611
3612The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3613and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3614type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3615color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3616display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3617old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3618`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3619compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3620should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3621modify their color-related behavior.
3622
3623The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3624any frame type.
3625
8a5719f0
EZ
3626** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3627
3628The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3629`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3630`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3631`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3632`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3633`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3634display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3635the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3636platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3637
a933dad1
DL
3638+++
3639** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3640
463cac2d 3641This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3642To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3643the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3644`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1 3645
8a33023e 3646The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
a933dad1
DL
3647end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3648Otherwise, it returns zero.
3649
463cac2d
GM
3650** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3651
3652There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3653buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3654property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3655
9a9dfda8 3656Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3657forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3658to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3659not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3660commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3661boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3662`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3663functions.
463cac2d
GM
3664
3665Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3666a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3667editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3668
9a9dfda8
GM
3669The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3670
59927f88 3671- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3672
3673Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3674
9a9dfda8
GM
3675A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3676If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9b2a085d 3677constrained position if that is different.
9a9dfda8
GM
3678
3679If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3680positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3681ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3682constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3683as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3684is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3685fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3686the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3687also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3688
3689If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3690NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3691unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3692C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3693only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3694
59927f88
MB
3695If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3696a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3697
3698Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3699
3700- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3701
59927f88 3702Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3703A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3704If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3705
3706- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3707
3708Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3709A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3710If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3711If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3712field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3713
3714- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3715
3716Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3717A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3718If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3719If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3720then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3721
3722- Function: field-string &optional POS
3723
3724Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3725A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3726If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3727
3728- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3729
3730Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3731A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3732If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3733
a933dad1
DL
3734+++
3735** Image support.
3736
3737Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3738strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3739(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3740replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3741
3742If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3743`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3744AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3745window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3746area.
3747
3748IMAGE is an image specification.
3749
3750*** Image specifications
3751
3752Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3753is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3754specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3755symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3756described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3757
3758The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3759
3760`:ascent ASCENT'
3761
576da55d
GM
3762ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3763If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3764to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3765
3766If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3767image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3768
5d94f558 3769If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3770centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3771of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3772overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3773
3774`:margin MARGIN'
3775
b30623be
GM
3776MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
3777as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
3778horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
a933dad1
DL
3779
3780`:relief RELIEF'
3781
3782RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3783around an image.
3784
f864120f 3785`:conversion ALGO'
a933dad1 3786
47e351a3
GM
3787Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3788
3789ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3790edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3791
3792ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3793apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3794nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3795position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3796around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3797neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3798transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3799x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3800below.
3801
3802 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3803 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3804 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3805
3806The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3807resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3808multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3809of the factors' absolute values.
3810
327652be 3811Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3812
47e351a3
GM
3813 (1 0 0
3814 0 0 0
3815 9 9 -1)
3816
3817Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3818
3819 ( 2 -1 0
3820 -1 0 1
3821 0 1 -2)
3822
ba9eeda1
GM
3823ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3824``disabled''.
3825
47e351a3
GM
3826`:mask MASK'
3827
3828If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3829the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3830image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3831background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
8a33023e 3832image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
47e351a3
GM
3833the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3834GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3835image.
a933dad1 3836
47e351a3
GM
3837If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3838in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3839`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3840
3841`:file FILE'
3842
3843Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3844search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3845building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3846may be present in the image specification.
3847
518df5c4
GM
3848`:data DATA'
3849
3850Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3851supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3852present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3853support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3854
a933dad1
DL
3855*** Supported image types
3856
b246b1f6 3857**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3858
3859XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3860properties supported are
3861
3862`:foreground FG'
3863
3864FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3865is the frame's foreground.
3866
46c5af7f 3867`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3868
3869BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3870the frame's background color.
3871
3872XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3873case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3874instead of a `:file' property.
3875
3876`:width WIDTH'
3877
3878WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3879
3880`:height HEIGHT'
3881
3882HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3883
3884`:data DATA'
3885
3886DATA must be either
3887
3888 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3889 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3890
3891 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3892
3893 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3894 bitmap.
3895
c76e04a8
GM
3896 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3897 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3898 in the file.
3899
a933dad1
DL
3900**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3901
3902XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3903`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3904found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3905`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3906
3907Additional image properties supported are:
3908
3909`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3910
3911SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3912name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3913name.
3914
3915XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3916add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3917
a933dad1
DL
3918The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3919to display compressed images.
3920
3921**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3922
3923PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3924mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3925mono images are
3926
3927`:foreground FG'
3928
3929FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3930is the frame's foreground.
3931
3932`:background FG'
3933
3934BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3935the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3936
3937**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3938
3939Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3940package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3941are:
3942
a933dad1
DL
3943**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3944
3945Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3946package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3947properties defined.
3948
3949**** GIF, image type `gif'
3950
3951Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3952`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3953
3954Additional image properties supported are:
3955
3956`:index INDEX'
3957
3958INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
8a33023e 3959multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large.
a933dad1
DL
3960
3961This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3962For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3963at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3964every 0.1 seconds.
3965
3966(defun show-anim (file max)
3967 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3968 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3969
3970(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3971 (when (= idx max)
3972 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3973 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3974 (save-excursion
3975 (set-buffer buffer)
3976 (goto-char (point-min))
3977 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3978 (insert-image img "x"))
3979 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3980
3981**** PNG, image type `png'
3982
3983Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3984package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3985properties defined.
3986
3987**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3988
3989Additional image properties supported are:
3990
3991`:pt-width WIDTH'
3992
3993WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3994integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3995
3996`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3997
3998HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3999must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
4000
4001`:bounding-box BOX'
4002
4003BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
4004the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
4005files. This is an required property.
4006
4007Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
4008lisp/gs.el.
4009
4010*** Lisp interface.
4011
79214ddf
FP
4012The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
4013which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
4014
4015Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
4016they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
4017The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
4018manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
4019images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
4020
4021*** Simplified image API, image.el
4022
4023The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
4024creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
4025can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
4026define an image based on available image types. The functions
4027`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
4028buffer.
4029
4030+++
4031** Display margins.
4032
4033Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
4034and images.
4035
4036To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
4037`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
4038`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
4039obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
4040`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4041the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4042of the display margins.
4043
4044You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
4045containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
4046one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
4047string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
4048in this file).
4049
4050+++
4051** Help display
4052
4053Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
4054moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
4055`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
4056that have a `help-echo' property.
4057
9662da0b 4058If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 4059is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
4060the window in which the help was found.
4061
4062If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
4063`help-echo' text property was found.
4064
4065If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
4066POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
4067
4068If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 4069the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 4070mouse.
d5aa31d8 4071
9662da0b
GM
4072If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
4073string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
4074
4075For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
4076determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
4077property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
4078For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
4079used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
4080
4081The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
4082the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
4083causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
4084
4085+++
4086** Vertical fractional scrolling.
4087
4088The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
4089This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
4090
4091The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
4092scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
4093The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
4094scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
4095used.
4096
79214ddf
FP
4097 (global-set-key [A-down]
4098 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 4099 (interactive)
79214ddf 4100 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 4101 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 4102 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
4103 #'(lambda ()
4104 (interactive)
79214ddf 4105 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
4106 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
4107
4108+++
4109** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4110
4111Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4112when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4113variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4114is called with one argument, POS.
4115
4116At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4117characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4118as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4119property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4120`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4121
4122+++
4123** Tool bar support.
4124
4125Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4126parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4127controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4128suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4129`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4130automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4131
4132*** Tool bar item definitions
4133
4134Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4135`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4136where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 4137
a933dad1
DL
4138CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4139evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4140the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4141property (see below).
79214ddf 4142
a933dad1
DL
4143BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4144binding are currently ignored.
4145
4146The following properties are recognized:
4147
4148`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 4149
a933dad1
DL
4150FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4151or disabled.
79214ddf 4152
a933dad1 4153`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 4154
a933dad1 4155FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 4156
a933dad1
DL
4157`:filter FUNCTION'
4158
4159FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4160FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4161used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4162
a933dad1
DL
4163`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4164
4165TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4166and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4167
a933dad1
DL
4168`:image IMAGES'
4169
4170IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4171image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4172meaning of each of the four elements:
4173
4174 Index Use when item is
4175 ----------------------------------------
4176 0 enabled and selected
4177 1 enabled and deselected
4178 2 disabled and selected
4179 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4180
4ba7246d
GM
4181If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4182algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4183
a933dad1 4184`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4185
a933dad1
DL
4186Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4187is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4188
dab96841 4189The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4190toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4191to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4192menu bar.
dab96841 4193
8628686a
DL
4194The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4195dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4196buffer-locally to override the global map.
4197
a933dad1
DL
4198*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4199
4200If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4201resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4202than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4203
79214ddf 4204If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4205raised when the mouse moves over them.
4206
4207You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4208`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
b30623be
GM
4209pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4210vertical margins . Default is 1.
a933dad1
DL
4211
4212You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4213`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4214
4215*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4216
4217You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4218a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4219
4220 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4221 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4222 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4223
4224is the original tool bar item definition, then
4225
4226 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4227
4228makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4229item.
4230
4231** Mode line changes.
4232
4233+++
4234*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4235
4236The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4237that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4238a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4239
42401. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4241a `local-map' text property.
4242
42432. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4244that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4245
42463. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4247is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4248`local-map' property.
4249
4250The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4251properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4252example.
4253
54522c9f
GM
4254*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4255evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4256
a933dad1
DL
4257+++
4258*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4259variable mode-line-format to nil.
4260
4261+++
4262*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4263
4264This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4265`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4266completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4267`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4268line.
4269
4270The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4271`header-line'.
4272
4273The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4274position in the header-line.
4275
4276+++
4277** Text property `display'
4278
623a0aae
GM
4279The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4280replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4281also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4282the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4283below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4284
623a0aae
GM
4285*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4286
4287To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4288text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4289
4290If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4291marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4292the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4293is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4294simpler form STRING as property value.
4295
a933dad1
DL
4296*** Variable width and height spaces
4297
4298To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4299specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4300`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4301area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4302marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4303displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4304simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4305
4306The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4307PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4308properties described below.
4309
4310The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4311characters having the `display' property.
4312
4313- :width WIDTH
4314
4315Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4316character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4317
4318- :relative-width FACTOR
4319
4320Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4321first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4322same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4323width of that character by FACTOR.
4324
4325- :align-to HPOS
4326
4327Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4328value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4329
4330Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4331
4332- :height HEIGHT
4333
4334Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4335normal line height.
4336
4337- :relative-height FACTOR
4338
4339The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4340of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4341
4342- :ascent ASCENT
4343
4344Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4345used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4346baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4347equal to 100.
4348
4349You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4350
4351*** Images
4352
4353A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4354. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4355in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4356their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4357the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4358`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4359area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4360the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4361as display specification.
4362
4363*** Other display properties
4364
c9e73000 4365- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4366
4367Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4368should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4369integer or float.
4370
c9e73000 4371- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4372
4373Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4374
4375If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4376means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4377the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4378``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4379a font is available counts as a step.
4380
4381If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4382as tall as the frame's default font.
4383
4384If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4385height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4386
4387Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4388`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4389
c9e73000 4390- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4391
4392FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4393font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4394raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4395amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4396`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4397
4398*** Conditional display properties
4399
4400All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4401has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4402applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
8a33023e 4403During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of
a933dad1
DL
4404the text having the `display' property.
4405
4406The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4407`(:when t SPEC)'.
4408
4409+++
4410** New menu separator types.
4411
4412Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4413item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4414treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4415to specify other menu separator types.
4416
4417- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4418
4419No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4420separator occurs.
4421
4422- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4423
4424A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4425
4426- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4427
4428A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4429
4430- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4431
4432A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4433
4434- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4435
4436A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4437
4438- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4439
f3780fe4 4440A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
a933dad1
DL
4441displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4442
4443- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4444
4445A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4446
4447- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4448
4449A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4450
4451- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4452
4453A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4454
4455- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4456
4457Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4458
4459- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4460
4461Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4462
4463- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4464
4465Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4466
4467- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4468
4469Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4470
4471Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4472the corresponding single-line separators.
4473
4474+++
4475** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4476
4477The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4478`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4479Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4480that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4481default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4482default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4483default foreground is black.
4484
4485The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4486(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4487`ScrollBarBackground').
4488
4489Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4490settings for scroll bar colors.
4491
4492+++
4493** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4494display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4495
4496---
4497** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4498starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4499on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4500line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4501the original window start.
4502
4503---
4504** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4505`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4506now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4507
4508+++
4509** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4510
4511A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4512`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4513windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4514other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4515
4516The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4517fixed-width and fixed-height.
4518
4519 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4520
4521A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4522fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4523window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4524change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4525temporarily to nil, for example
4526
4527 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4528 (enlarge-window 10))
4529
79214ddf 4530Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4531or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4532
4533** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4534terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4535to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4536overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4537horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4538support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4539
3787e12e 4540
0cb146bf 4541
05197f40 4542\f
3787e12e
GM
4543* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4544
4545** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4546input.
4547
4548** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4549
4550** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4551
4552** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4553only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4554exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4555(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4556(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4557
4558** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4559been added.
4560
05197f40 4561\f
3787e12e
GM
4562* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4563
4564** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4565
0cb146bf 4566
05197f40 4567\f
3787e12e
GM
4568* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4569
4570** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4571M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
05197f40 4572\f
3787e12e
GM
4573* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4574
4575** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4576
4577You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4578Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4579`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4580
4581If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4582is the one that is used.
4583
4584** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4585the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4586Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4587separate from the command's regular output.
4588Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4589says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4590In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4591the buffer name.
4592
4593When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4594output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4595it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4596cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4597
4598** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4599the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4600is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4601created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4602
4603** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4604example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4605match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4606quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4607
4608** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4609now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4610if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4611they never ignore case.
4612
4613** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4614under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4615applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4616of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4617just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4618convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4619part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4620
4621If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4622the same format that was used in the file before.
4623
4624You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4625`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4626
4627** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4628renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4629This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4630
4631** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4632The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4633buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4634your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4635is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4636end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4637Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4638
4639The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4640eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4641control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4642format. You can now customize these variables.
4643
4644** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4645filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4646filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4647enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4648
4649** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4650in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4651windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4652
4653** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4654dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4655doesn't have any effect.
4656
4657** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4658not one per buffer.
4659
4660** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4661use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4662 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4663
4664** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4665To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4666`auto-show-mode' command.
4667
4668** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4669avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4670versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4671choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4672occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4673
4674** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4675cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4676
4677** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4678character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4679feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4680
4681** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4682the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4683interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4684and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4685
4686** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4687
4688The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4689that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4690one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4691codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4692set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4693
4694Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4695from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4696
4697IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4698equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4699a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4700`?' on other systems.
4701
4702IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4703feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4704Unix.
4705
4706Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4707current codepage when it starts.
4708
4709** Mail changes
4710
4711*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4712`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4713appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4714non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4715MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4716headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4717latin-1:
4718
4719 MIME-version: 1.0
4720 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4721 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4722
4723*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4724default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4725default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4726sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4727buffer-file-coding-system.
4728
4729You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4730sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4731mail.
4732
4733*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4734if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4735Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4736list of possible coding systems.
4737
4738** CC Mode changes
4739
4740*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4741modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4742longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4743docstring for details.
4744
4745*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4746symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4747found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4748prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4749lineup functions use this feature currently.
4750
4751*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4752"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4753
4754*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4755"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4756
4757*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4758from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4759symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4760c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4761anonymous classes.
4762
4763*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4764syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4765
4766*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4767inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4768support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4769function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4770
4771*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4772(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4773brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4774c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4775(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4776
4777*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4778
4779*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4780
4781*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4782for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4783
4784*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4785
4786*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4787associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4788This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4789circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4790class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4791
4792** Gnus changes.
4793
4794*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4795added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4796Gnus manual for the full story.
4797
4798*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4799before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4800group, which is created automatically.
4801
4802*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4803values.
4804
4805*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4806
4807*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4808outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4809
4810*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4811`C-u C-c C-c'.
4812
4813*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4814
4815*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4816re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4817
4818*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4819
4820*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4821Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4822
4823*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4824`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4825
4826*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4827control over simplification.
4828
4829*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4830
4831*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4832limit.
4833
4834*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4835
4836*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4837
4838*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4839If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4840rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4841
8a33023e 4842*** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3787e12e
GM
4843`a' forces normal posting method.
4844
4845*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4846-- `W d'.
4847
4848*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4849to a non-nil value.
4850
4851*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4852where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4853
4854*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4855has been added.
4856
4857*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4858
4859*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4860
4861*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4862`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4863
4864*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4865`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4866
4867*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4868
4869*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4870been added.
4871
4872*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4873`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4874
4875*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4876updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4877
4878*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4879
4880*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4881
4882*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4883
4884** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4885
4886*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4887options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4888nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4889
4890*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4891TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4892of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4893TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4894can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4895
4896*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4897All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4898but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4899the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4900
4901*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4902the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4903buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4904mismatch.
4905
4906** Changes to RefTeX mode
4907
4908*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4909file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4910
4911*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4912lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4913characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4914removed from the label.
4915
4916*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4917a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4918
4919*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4920customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4921
4922*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4923`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4924expressions.
4925
4926*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4927
4928** New/deleted modes and packages
4929
4930*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4931SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4932
4933*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4934editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4935SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4936
4937*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4938changes with a special face.
4939
4940*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4941this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4942Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
05197f40 4943\f
3787e12e
GM
4944* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4945
4946** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4947This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4948conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4949and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4950check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4951
4952The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4953Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4954distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4955
4956** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4957MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4958controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4959directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4960Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4961on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4962string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4963program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4964printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4965
4966** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4967output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4968available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4969input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4970temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4971program.
4972
4973An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4974and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4975programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4976automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4977as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4978ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4979
4980** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4981a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4982MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4983was not documented clearly before.
4984
4985** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4986This includes Tetris and Snake.
05197f40 4987\f
3787e12e
GM
4988* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4989
4990** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4991return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4992They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4993meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4994
4995** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4996WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4997and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4998
4999** Changes in the file-attributes function.
5000
5001*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
5002It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
5003
5004*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
5005the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
5006integers.
5007
5008** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
5009files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
5010arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
5011file names and attributes are returned.
5012
5013** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
5014sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
8a33023e 5015accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
3787e12e
GM
5016It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
5017returns the result.
5018
5019** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
5020to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
5021
5022** New functions for base64 conversion:
5023
5024The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
5025into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
5026performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
5027optionally.
5028
5029Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
5030job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
5031
5032**
5033The new function process-running-child-p
5034will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
5035terminal to its own child process.
5036
5037** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
5038when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
5039to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
5040itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
5041
5042** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
5043be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
5044
5045** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
5046:included is an alias for :visible.
5047
5048easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
5049easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
5050to move or copy menu entries.
5051
5052** Multibyte editing changes
5053
5054*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
5055an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
5056make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
5057work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
5058char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
5059 (setq char (sref str idx)
5060 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
5061The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
5062
5063If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
5064(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
5065 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
5066
5067*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
5068region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
5069deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
5070
8a33023e 5071 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
3787e12e
GM
5072
5073This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
5074across the boundary.
5075
5076*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
5077`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
5078 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
5079 contains 8-bit characters.
5080 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
5081 contains invalid characters.
5082
5083*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
5084text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
5085preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
5086text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
5087way.
5088
5089*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
5090If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
5091end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
5092prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
5093
5094*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
5095compose Thai characters in a string.
5096
5097** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
5098argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
5099for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
5100menus should always use the third argument.
5101
5102** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
5103read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
5104arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
5105input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
5106
5107** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
5108of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
5109programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
5110inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
5111
5112** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5113the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5114returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5115echo area contents.
5116
5117 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5118
5119** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5120NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5121requested feature cannot be loaded.
5122
5123** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5124foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5125means to clear out that attribute.
5126
5127** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5128gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5129
5130** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5131read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5132unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5133end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5134
5135** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5136the gap of the current buffer.
5137
5138** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5139to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5140current buffer.
5141
5142** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5143facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5144These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5145it back in after any modifications have been made.
05197f40 5146\f
3787e12e
GM
5147* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5148
5149** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5150the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5151/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5152directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5153subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5154
5155Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5156names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5157Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5158which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5159these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5160
5161Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5162starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5163time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5164
5165This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5166Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5167to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5168subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5169`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5170results.
5171
5172** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5173GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5174that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5175fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
05197f40 5176\f
3787e12e
GM
5177* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5178
5179** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5180including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5181it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5182perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5183
5184** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5185specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5186region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5187further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5188command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5189within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5190are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5191region.
5192
5193In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5194selective undo.
5195
5196** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5197unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5198buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5199effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5200Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5201
5202The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5203though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5204-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5205load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5206
5207** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5208no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5209enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5210something that most users not do.
5211
5212** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5213operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5214The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5215applications.
5216
5217C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5218pasting operations.
5219
5220** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5221setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5222like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5223printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5224`ps-printer-name'.
5225
5226** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5227minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5228any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5229except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5230incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5231hits a new word.
5232
5233Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5234Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5235to be confused by TeX commands.
5236
5237You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5238correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5239clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5240of various alternative replacements and actions.
5241
5242Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5243the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5244corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5245alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5246flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5247
5248Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5249flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5250
5251** Changes in input method usage.
5252
5253Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5254the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5255respectively.
5256
5257You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5258
5259If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5260of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5261
5262The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5263that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5264
5265 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5266
5267 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5268
5269 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5270 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5271
5272 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5273 given in the following case:
5274 o When you are using a complex input method.
5275 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5276
5277If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5278input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5279and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5280setting it to t is helpful.
5281
5282The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5283
5284In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5285keys:
5286 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5287 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5288 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5289These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5290environment.
5291
5292** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5293names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5294minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5295get
5296
5297 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5298
5299which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5300
5301Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5302Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5303
5304** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5305at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5306its owner and group.
5307
5308** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5309Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5310
5311** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5312contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5313
5314** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5315which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5316in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5317by the left edge of the rectangle.
5318
5319** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5320increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5321C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5322for writing keyboard macros.
5323
5324** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5325files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5326frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5327the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5328additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5329info.
5330
5331** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5332
5333** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5334query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5335contents only.
5336
5337** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5338confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5339the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5340says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5341
5342** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5343non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5344literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5345
5346** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5347now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5348Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5349inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5350
5351** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5352failure if the command produces no output.
5353
5354** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5355manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5356the mouse.
5357
5358** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5359mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5360function and variable names.
5361
5362** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5363reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5364file-coding-system-alist.
5365
5366** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5367t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5368converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5369the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5370according to the current fontset.
5371
5372** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5373
5374The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5375that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5376nonascii-insert-offset.
5377
5378For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5379enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5380nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5381characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5382
5383** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5384an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5385
5386** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5387letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5388
5389** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5390are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5391command keys.
5392
5393** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5394user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5395
5396Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5397user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5398all variables that have documentation.
5399
5400** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5401shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5402that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5403minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5404it should show; the default is 20.
5405
5406Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5407the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5408of your input.
5409
5410** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5411all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5412recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5413argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5414the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5415Newly added options are included as well.
5416
5417If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5418then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5419for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5420
5421This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5422Customize menu.
5423
5424** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5425the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5426
5427** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5428buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5429invoked.
5430
5431** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5432that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5433The default is 1.
5434
5435** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5436syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5437new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5438(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5439sensibly.
5440
5441** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5442
5443** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5444value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5445two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5446
5447** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5448reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5449for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5450every night.
5451
5452** Desktop changes
5453
5454*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5455the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5456
5457*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5458and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5459
5460** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5461read and post multi-lingual articles.
5462
5463** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5464doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5465be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5466outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5467the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5468made invisible again.
5469
5470** Mail reading and sending changes
5471
5472*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5473the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5474changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5475toggle.
5476
5477*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5478now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5479summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5480the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5481rmail-default-body-file.
5482
5483*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5484longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5485handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5486
5487*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5488it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5489is evaluated to insert the signature.
5490
5491*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5492outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5493handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5494putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5495transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5496especially interested in trying feedmail.
5497
5498feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5499feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5500provided by feedmail are:
5501
5502**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5503stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5504there is also a queue for draft messages
5505
5506**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5507be prompted for confirmation
5508
5509**** does smart filling of address headers
5510
5511**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5512the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5513can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5514
5515**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5516the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5517/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5518function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5519
5520** Dired changes
5521
5522*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5523files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5524
5525*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5526run Dired on the directory name at point.
5527
5528*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5529files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5530for a specified regexp.
5531
5532** VC Changes
5533
5534*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5535conveniently.
5536
5537*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5538faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5539Dired.
5540
5541VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5542directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5543listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5544currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5545
5546You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5547then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5548vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5549control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5550on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5551
5552All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5553is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5554`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5555the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5556`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5557
5558The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5559toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5560VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5561`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5562
5563Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5564ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5565command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5566
5567*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5568file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5569session to resolve them.
5570
5571Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5572resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5573contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5574uses as well).
5575
5576*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5577command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5578you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5579either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5580branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5581If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5582using ediff.
5583
5584** Changes in Font Lock
5585
5586*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5587are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5588use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5589unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5590compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5591
5592** Frame name display changes
5593
5594*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5595frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5596raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5597when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5598
5599*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5600frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5601menu.
5602
5603** Comint (subshell) changes
5604
5605*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5606subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5607with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5608
5609*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5610
5611C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5612that is, the line after the last line you got.
5613You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5614
5615C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5616send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5617the following line.
5618
5619C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5620which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5621previously sent input.
5622
5623C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5624it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5625as the search string.
5626
5627*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5628automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5629
5630** C mode changes
5631
5632*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5633and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5634assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5635definition.
5636
5637*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5638(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5639Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5640style is still the default however.
5641
5642*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5643
5644*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5645are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5646them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5647
5648*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5649and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5650
5651*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5652namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5653
5654*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5655makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5656
5657*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5658c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5659
5660*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5661should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5662package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5663variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5664
5665** Changes to hippie-expand.
5666
5667*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5668non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5669which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5670
5671*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5672non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5673expanding dynamically.
5674
5675*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5676non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5677
5678*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5679non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5680this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5681expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5682
5683*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5684
5685** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5686
5687*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5688bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5689automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5690bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5691against the first word in the title.
5692
5693*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5694capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5695bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5696lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5697lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5698bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5699
5700*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5701generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5702replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5703bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5704
5705** Changes in vcursor.el.
5706
5707*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5708and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5709variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5710entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5711`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5712in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5713
5714*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5715Editing group once the package is loaded.
5716
5717*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5718generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
8a33023e 5719vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
3787e12e
GM
5720
5721*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5722vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5723
5724** Ispell changes.
5725
5726*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5727buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5728are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5729
5730*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5731A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5732and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5733defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5734include:
5735
5736 o URLs are automatically skipped
5737 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5738
5739*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5740
5741** Changes to RefTeX mode
5742
5743RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5744large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5745re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5746section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5747
5748*** New recursive parser.
5749
5750The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5751entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5752recursive parser scans the individual files.
5753
5754*** Parsing only part of a document.
5755
5756Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5757partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5758the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5759
5760 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5761
5762*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5763
5764This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5765
5766 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5767
5768*** Using multiple selection buffers
5769
5770If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5771for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5772
5773 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5774
5775*** References to external documents.
5776
5777The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5778documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5779documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5780macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5781RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5782the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5783The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5784
5785*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5786
8a33023e 5787The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
3787e12e
GM
5788and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5789
5790Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5791the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5792
5793*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5794
5795The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5796buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5797
5798*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5799
5800The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5801contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5802`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5803have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5804enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5805at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5806more.
5807
5808*** Support for the varioref package
5809
5810The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5811
5812*** New hooks
5813
5814Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5815and citations are created. These hooks are
5816`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5817`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5818
5819*** Citations outside LaTeX
5820
5821The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5822a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5823
5824*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5825
5826The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5827fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5828fontified, use
5829
5830 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5831
5832** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5833With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5834the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5835directories that contain the same file name.
5836
5837Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5838Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5839file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5840Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5841have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5842names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5843directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5844directory.
5845
5846** New modes and packages
5847
5848*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5849It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5850it, but some do not.
5851
5852*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5853code.
5854
5855*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5856current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5857around in a buffer.
5858
5859Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5860
5861*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5862uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5863be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5864established system of notation similar to Chess.
5865
5866*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5867documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5868guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5869
5870*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5871available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5872system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5873simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5874functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5875the like.
5876
5877*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5878identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5879
5880*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5881within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5882used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5883the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5884
5885*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5886
5887 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5888 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5889 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5890 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5891 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5892 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5893 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5894 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5895 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5896 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5897 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5898
5899 Platform-specific modes:
5900
5901 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5902 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5903 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5904 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5905 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5906 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5907 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5908 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5909 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
05197f40 5910\f
3787e12e
GM
5911* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5912
5913** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5914use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5915That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5916Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5917
5918Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5919you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5920consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5921
5922** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5923and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5924specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5925searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5926
5927** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5928multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5929character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5930environment.
5931
5932** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5933take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5934string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5935current input method for reading this one event.
5936
5937** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5938now control whether to output certain characters as
5939backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5940non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5941characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5942in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
05197f40 5943\f
3787e12e
GM
5944* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5945
5946** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5947of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5948
5949** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5950in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5951always increases point by 1.
5952
5953The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5954considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5955
5956See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5957
5958** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5959Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5960default value changed. For example,
5961
5962 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5963 :type 'integer
5964 :group 'foo
5965 :version "20.3")
5966
5967 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5968 :version "20.3")
5969
5970If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5971default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5972is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5973`:version' in the top level group.
5974
5975This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5976
5977** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5978starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5979
5980However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5981symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5982support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5983to themselves.
5984
5985If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5986this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5987values whatever.
5988
5989** There is a new debugger command, R.
5990It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5991in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5992
5993** Frame-local variables.
5994
5995You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5996the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5997local bindings for that variable.
5998
5999These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
6000frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
6001modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
6002parameter name.
6003
6004Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
6005Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
6006active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
6007that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
6008
6009It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
6010clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
6011very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
6012through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
6013
6014** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
6015"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
6016evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
6017makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
6018See the documentation in sregex.el.
6019
6020** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
6021is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
6022parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
6023The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
6024
6025** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
6026If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
6027
6028** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
6029known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
6030define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
6031
6032** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
6033when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
6034it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
6035history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
6036
6037The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
6038return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
6039empty input.
6040
6041** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
6042for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
6043`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
6044Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
6045`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
6046
6047** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
6048echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
6049a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
6050default password to use if the user enters nothing.
6051
6052** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
6053specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
6054function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
6055place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
6056non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
6057
6058** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
6059If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
6060up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
6061end of the window, even if this requires computation.
6062
6063** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
6064which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
6065If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
6066
6067** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
6068holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
6069was directed to display this buffer.
6070
6071** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
6072with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
6073describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
6074other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
6075set-window-configuration.
6076
6077** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
6078window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
6079positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
6080windows and the choice of buffers to display.
6081
6082** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
6083override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
6084look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
6085
6086If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
6087non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
6088map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
6089
6090minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
6091and it is meant to be set by major modes.
6092
6093** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
6094except that it discards all text properties from the result.
6095
6096** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
6097USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
6098floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
6099
6100** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
6101to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
6102in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
6103it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
6104
6105** Menu changes
6106
6107*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
6108keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
6109better supported.
6110
6111The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6112a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6113you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6114can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6115then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6116
6117*** A new format for menu items is supported.
6118
6119In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6120 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6121defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6122starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6123
6124The format is:
6125 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6126 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6127where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6128string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6129The supported properties include
6130
6131:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6132 item is enabled.
6133:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6134 item should appear in the menu.
6135:filter FILTER-FN
6136 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6137 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6138 It should return a binding to use instead.
6139:keys DESCRIPTION
6140 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
f3780fe4 6141 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
3787e12e
GM
6142 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6143:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6144 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6145 keyboard binding.
6146:key-sequence nil
6147 This means that the command normally has no
6148 keyboard equivalent.
6149:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6150:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6151 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6152 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6153 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6154
6155Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6156Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6157
6158(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6159
6160** New event types
6161
6162*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6163mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6164corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6165which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6166
6167 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6168
6169where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6170same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6171indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6172negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6173the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6174forward, away from the user.
6175
6176As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6177
6178*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6179files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6180and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6181filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6182loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6183
6184 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6185
6186where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6187same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6188that were dragged and dropped.
6189
6190As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6191
6192** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6193
6194*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6195any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6196to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6197
6198*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6199can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6200that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6201
6202*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6203in Emacs 19 and before.
6204
6205The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6206The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6207
6208*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6209buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6210unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6211representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6212
6213This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6214as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6215viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6216one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6217will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6218
6219This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6220representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6221(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6222consistent with the new representation.
6223
6224*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6225representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6226about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6227however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6228
6229The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6230nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6231using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6232
6233*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6234representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6235representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6236
6237The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6238loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6239is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6240
6241*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6242which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6243
6244*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6245which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6246
6247*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6248portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6249so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6250You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6251
6252*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6253it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6254
6255*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6256convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6257buffer or string being searched.
6258
6259One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6260[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6261searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6262searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6263obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6264you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6265expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6266
6267*** Structure of coding system changed.
6268
6269All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6270by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6271which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6272as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6273vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6274your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6275define-coding-system-alias.
6276
6277The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6278the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6279access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6280pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6281character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6282safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6283'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6284`iso-8859-1'.
6285
6286Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6287The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6288coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6289(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6290
6291Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6292also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6293are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6294the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6295
6296*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6297proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6298This function requires a user interaction.
6299
6300*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6301find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6302select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6303systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6304a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6305select-safe-coding-system.
6306
6307*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6308decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6309last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6310was done.
6311
6312*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6313used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6314coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6315
6316*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6317return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6318characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6319`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6320
6321*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6322coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6323coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6324converted.
6325
6326*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6327coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6328
6329*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6330character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6331character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6332each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6333either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6334range of characters.
6335
6336*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6337Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6338
6339*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6340in the current buffer at position POS.
6341
6342*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6343input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6344function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6345character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6346event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6347binding input-method-function to nil.
6348
6349The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6350method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6351input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6352the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6353not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6354
6355The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6356subsequent events of a key sequence.
6357
6358*** You can customize any language environment by using
6359set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6360
6361The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6362customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6363instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6364environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6365exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
05197f40 6366\f
3787e12e
GM
6367* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6368
6369** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6370options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6371at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6372tree structure.
6373
6374M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6375user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6376
6377With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6378session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6379in your .emacs file.)
6380
6381** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6382You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6383
6384** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6385This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6386
6387** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6388immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6389kills the region.
6390
6391The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6392delete the character before point, as usual.
6393
6394** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6395on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6396by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6397
6398** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6399insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6400the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6401onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6402history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6403past.)
6404
6405** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6406This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6407in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6408TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6409makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6410
6411As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6412and is an alias for it.
6413
6414If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6415use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6416
6417** Scrolling changes
6418
6419*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6420position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6421
6422In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6423on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6424where it started.
6425
6426*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6427move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6428screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6429does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6430
6431*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6432top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6433comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6434recenters the window.
6435
6436** International character set support (MULE)
6437
6438Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6439including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6440Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6441Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6442features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6443MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6444
6445Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6446coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6447character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6448variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6449into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6450
6451Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6452generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6453supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6454language, to make it possible to type them.
6455
6456The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6457character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6458
6459The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6460to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6461
6462You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6463
6464 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6465
6466Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6467characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6468argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6469already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6470characters for their work until they want to change.
6471
6472*** Input methods
6473
6474An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6475specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6476has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6477the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6478support several input methods.
6479
6480The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6481another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6482work.
6483
6484A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6485characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6486composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6487consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6488sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6489letter.
6490
6491The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6492by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6493First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6494marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6495mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6496
6497None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6498they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6499phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6500converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6501
6502Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6503word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6504typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6505the first guess is wrong.
6506
6507*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6508turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6509
6510If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6511byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6512they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6513the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6514
6515However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6516use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6517includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6518translate automatically to and from either one.
6519
6520*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6521
6522Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6523file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6524sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6525what you want.
6526
6527If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6528example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6529system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6530multibyte characters in that buffer.
6531
6532If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6533character conversion as well.
6534
6535*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6536
6537A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6538Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6539requires using many fonts.
6540
6541Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6542collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6543
6544A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6545the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6546have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6547you would use a font.
6548
6549If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6550specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6551display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6552
6553The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6554(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6555characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6556or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6557and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6558
6559*** Defining fontsets.
6560
6561Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6562chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6563with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6564
6565Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6566of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6567`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6568standard fontset are created automatically.
6569
6570If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6571argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6572FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6573with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6574name is `fontset-startup'.
6575
6576Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6577The resource value should have this form:
6578 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6579FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6580 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6581 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6582 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6583The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6584of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
0969bd6a
EZ
6585CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
6586should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
3787e12e
GM
6587
6588Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6589last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6590You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6591
6592For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6593font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6594following resource,
6595 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6596the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6597 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6598Here is the substitution rule:
6599 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6600 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6601 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6602 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6603 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6604
6605The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6606fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6607that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6608
6609With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6610like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6611name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6612fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6613fontsets.
6614
6615*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6616defaults for a particular choice of language.
6617
6618Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6619method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6620visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6621already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6622language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6623system for new files that you create.
6624
6625It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6626set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6627whole Emacs session.
6628
6629For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6630chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6631with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6632
6633*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6634specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6635specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6636the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6637coding systems that Emacs supports.
6638
6639*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6640lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6641This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6642After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6643is used for *the immediately following command*.
6644
6645So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6646write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6647
6648If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6649then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6650
6651For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6652visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6653
6654*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6655construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6656to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6657specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6658of the file.
6659
6660*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6661the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6662code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6663translated into that character code.
6664
6665This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6666various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6667
6668By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6669
6670*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6671the coding system for keyboard input.
6672
6673Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6674with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6675some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6676
6677By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6678
6679Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6680input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6681translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6682to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6683designed to work with terminals.
6684
6685*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6686specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6687This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6688has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6689translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6690in the corresponding buffer.
6691
6692By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6693
6694*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6695to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6696It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6697
6698*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6699an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6700command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6701want to use.
6702
6703C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6704method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6705
6706*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6707layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6708remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6709which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6710
6711*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6712the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6713related information.
6714
6715*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6716HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6717scripts.
6718
6719*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6720information about the support for a particular language.
6721You specify the language as an argument.
6722
6723*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6724the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6725first dash.
6726
6727A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6728(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6729whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
67301 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6731
6732 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6733 B big5 (Chinese)
6734 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6735 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6736 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6737 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6738 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6739 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6740 K euc-korea (Korean)
6741 R koi8 (Russian)
6742 Q tibetan
6743 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6744 T lao
6745 T tis620 (Thai)
6746 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6747 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6748 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6749 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6750 z hz (Chinese)
6751
6752When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6753two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6754coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6755keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6756
6757*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6758conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6759
6760When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6761into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6762rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6763Rmail files themselves.
6764
6765*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6766conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6767
6768Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6769for sending mail:
6770
6771- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6772- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6773- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6774 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6775- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6776
6777*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6778to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6779Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6780translations.
6781
6782** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6783of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6784insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6785without any conversion.
6786
6787** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6788You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6789RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6790any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6791
6792** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6793functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6794
6795Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6796Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6797
6798Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6799mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6800
6801** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6802complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6803in the buffer before point.
6804
6805With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6806symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6807you are using.
6808
6809With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6810just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6811
6812** File locking works with NFS now.
6813
6814The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6815in the same directory as FILENAME.
6816
6817This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6818works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6819can become a bottleneck.
6820
6821The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6822does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6823create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6824file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6825rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6826so useful that the change is worth while.
6827
6828When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6829are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6830collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6831tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6832
6833** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6834it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6835show-paren-mode.
6836
6837** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6838selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6839delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6840
6841** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6842within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6843complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6844
6845** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6846it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6847set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6848
6849** Changes in View mode.
6850
6851*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6852Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6853
6854*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6855view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6856
6857*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6858previous state.
6859
6860*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6861scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6862
6863*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6864non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6865not just the selected window.
6866
6867*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6868read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6869turns View mode on or off.
6870
6871*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6872how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6873delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6874
6875** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6876now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6877
6878** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6879has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6880presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6881which version to compare with.
6882
6883** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6884blocks if a match is inside the block.
6885
6886The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6887is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6888isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6889shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6890
6891By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6892of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6893blocks, all of them or none.
6894
6895** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6896current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6897confirmation first.
6898
6899** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6900now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6901However, the mode will not be changed if
6902(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6903(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6904 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6905(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6906
6907This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6908
6909However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6910these commands do not change the major mode.
6911
6912** M-x occur changes.
6913
6914*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6915it performs a case-sensitive search.
6916
6917*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6918if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6919using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6920
6921** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6922in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6923window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6924that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6925buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6926
6927** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6928after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6929appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6930come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6931
6932** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6933selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6934buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6935
6936** Outline mode changes.
6937
6938*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6939
6940*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6941
6942** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6943you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6944Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6945was already active.
6946
6947The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6948unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6949get confused by it.
6950
6951If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6952set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6953
6954** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6955
6956*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6957conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6958character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6959including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6960
6961The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6962mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6963copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6964
6965*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6966are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6967values.
6968
6969`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6970case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6971`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6972case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6973
6974** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6975certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6976can be. The default value is 30.
6977
6978** Changes in Mail mode.
6979
6980*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6981Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6982composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6983`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6984`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6985behavior.
6986
6987C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6988compose-mail-other-frame.
6989
6990*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6991the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6992replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6993buffer that shows the original message.
6994
6995*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6996with separator lines around the contents.
6997
6998*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6999in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
7000definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
7001need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
7002
7003*** New features in the mail-complete command.
7004
7005**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
7006for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
7007controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
7008Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
7009
7010**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
7011to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
7012/etc/passwd.
7013
7014**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
7015to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
7016/etc/passwd.
7017
7018** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
7019special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
7020directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
7021reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
7022
7023Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
7024when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
7025be taken to be magic.
7026
7027** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
7028files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
7029available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
7030
7031M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
7032(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
7033
7034** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
7035suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
7036
7037In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
7038
7039new key dired.el binding old key
7040------- ---------------- -------
7041 * c dired-change-marks c
7042 * m dired-mark m
7043 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
7044 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
7045 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
7046 * u dired-unmark u
7047 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
7048 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
7049 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
7050 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
7051 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
7052 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
7053
7054** Rmail changes.
7055
7056*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
7057saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
7058chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
7059each time you run it.
7060
7061*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
7062whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
7063
7064*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
7065messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
7066means to move in the opposite direction.
7067
7068*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
7069you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
7070
7071*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
7072just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
7073It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
7074can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
7075for output.
7076
7077** Gnus changes.
7078
7079*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
7080
7081*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
7082Gnus.
7083
7084*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
7085`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
7086
7087*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
7088article mode line.
7089
7090*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
7091
7092*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
7093
7094(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
7095
7096*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
7097are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
7098`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
7099
7100*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
7101
7102*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
7103
7104*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
7105See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
7106
7107*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
7108Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
7109used to pick articles.
7110
7111*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7112another have been added.
7113
7114 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7115
7116*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7117generating lines in buffers.
7118
7119*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7120`M-C-_'.
7121
7122*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7123
7124*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7125
7126 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7127
7128*** Scores can be decayed.
7129
7130 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7131
7132*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7133Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7134
7135*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7136the native server.
7137
7138 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7139
7140*** A new command for reading collections of documents
7141(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
7142
7143*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7144
7145*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7146even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7147
7148*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7149(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7150
7151 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7152 a group.
7153
7154*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7155sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7156
7157 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7158
7159*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7160
7161 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7162
7163*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7164
7165 Use the `Y c' command.
7166
7167*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7168
7169*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7170
7171 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7172
7173*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7174from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7175
7176 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7177
7178*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7179
7180*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7181the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7182
7183 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7184
7185Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7186and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7187from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7188hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7189this issue.)
7190
7191Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7192automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7193particular news group. This can be done by:
7194
7195 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7196
7197Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7198of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7199"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7200system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7201for reading and posting).
7202
7203CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7204 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7205Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7206newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7207there.
7208
7209Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7210default. Here are some of these default settings:
7211
7212 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7213 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7214 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7215 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7216 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7217
7218When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7219the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7220
7221** CC mode changes.
7222
7223*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7224code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7225values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7226this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7227Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7228loaded.
7229
7230If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7231Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7232style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7233share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7234c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7235must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7236
7237*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7238of the current buffer.
7239
7240*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7241it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7242of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7243
7244*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7245style that the Python developers like.
7246
7247*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7248This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7249just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7250
7251** VC Changes [new]
7252
9614842d 7253*** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
3787e12e
GM
7254name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7255directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7256
7257This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7258master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7259developers.
7260
7261You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7262RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7263
7264*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7265other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7266writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7267calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7268
7269*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7270version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7271
7272** Calendar changes.
7273
9614842d
JW
7274*** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
7275subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
7276you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
7277following/previous years.
7278
7279*** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
7280the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
7281calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
7282each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
7283calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
7284supposed attribute of God.
3787e12e
GM
7285
7286** ps-print changes
7287
7288There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7289
7290*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7291
7292The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7293formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7294`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7295`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7296It defaults to `letter'.
7297If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7298
7299The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7300of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7301non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7302
7303The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7304It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7305It defaults to 1.
7306
7307*** Horizontal layout
7308
7309The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7310`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7311All are measured in points.
7312
7313*** Vertical layout
7314
7315The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7316`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7317All are measured in points.
7318
7319*** Headers
7320
7321If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7322`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7323margin above the text.
7324
7325If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7326framing box is printed around the header.
7327
7328The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7329`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7330
7331The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7332`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7333`ps-header-font-size'.
7334
7335*** Font managing
7336
7337The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7338used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7339`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7340elements to this alist.
7341
7342The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7343for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7344
7345** hideshow changes.
7346
7347*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7348C++, ; for lisp).
7349
7350*** Support for java-mode added.
7351
7352*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7353in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7354
f3780fe4 7355*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
3787e12e
GM
7356the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7357way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7358
7359*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7360robust and a lot faster.
7361
7362*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7363
7364*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7365to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7366documentation for more details.
7367
7368** Changes in Enriched mode.
7369
7370*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7371filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7372of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7373use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7374the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7375
7376*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7377distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7378as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7379as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7380
7381** Font Lock mode
7382
7383*** Custom support
7384
7385The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7386font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7387faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7388group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7389your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7390consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7391
7392You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7393
7394*** Maximum decoration
7395
7396Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7397default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7398of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7399supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7400to get the old behavior.
7401
7402*** New support
7403
7404Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7405
7406Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7407support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7408
7409*** Configurable support
7410
7411Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7412additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7413c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7414java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7415list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7416of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7417convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7418
7419Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7420way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7421it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7422
7423*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7424
7425You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7426highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7427for any mode.
7428
7429For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7430
7431 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7432
7433in your ~/.emacs.
7434
7435*** New faces
7436
7437Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7438font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7439distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7440to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7441
7442*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7443
7444The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7445cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7446same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7447
7448*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7449
7450The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7451according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7452the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7453non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7454refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7455the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7456Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7457
7458This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7459For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7460this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7461refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7462containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7463the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7464
7465As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7466
7467Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7468Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7469Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7470new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7471
7472If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7473settings.
7474
7475** Ada mode changes.
7476
7477*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7478If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7479procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7480you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7481stubs.
7482
7483*** There are two new commands:
7484 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7485 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7486
7487The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7488`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7489`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7490
7491*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7492is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7493Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7494
7495*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7496formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7497places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7498space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7499
7500** Scheme mode changes.
7501
7502*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7503mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7504for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7505with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7506have any effect.
7507
7508If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7509still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7510scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7511variables as buffer-local variables.
7512
7513*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7514Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7515
7516** Changes to the emacsclient program
7517
7518*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7519USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7520associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7521can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7522
7523*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7524it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7525buffer in Emacs.
7526
7527*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7528use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7529ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7530option takes precedence.
7531
7532** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7533constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7534(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7535
7536** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7537which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7538the current defun.
7539
7540** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7541following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7542
7543** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7544and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7545necessary).
7546
7547** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7548if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7549these register values no longer become completely useless.
7550If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7551asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7552it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7553
7554** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7555example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7556be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7557you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7558
7559You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7560variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7561file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7562revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7563only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7564
7565** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7566since it applies only to the current frame.
7567
7568** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7569file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7570and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7571
7572This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7573multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7574variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7575tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7576instead of just the file you are editing.
7577
7578** RefTeX mode
7579
7580RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7581and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7582different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7583multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7584turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7585
7586C-c ( reftex-label
7587 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7588 knows which kind of label is needed.
7589
7590C-c ) reftex-reference
7591 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7592 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7593
7594C-c [ reftex-citation
7595 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7596 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7597
7598C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7599 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7600
7601C-c = reftex-toc
7602 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7603 can quickly jump to every section.
7604
7605Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7606commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7607Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7608reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7609C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7610
7611** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7612
7613*** Info documentation is now available.
7614
7615*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7616both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7617
7618*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7619bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7620
7621*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7622(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7623
7624*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7625entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7626appropriate functions.
7627
7628*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7629entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7630
7631*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7632been cleaned.
7633
7634*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7635bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7636
7637*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7638shall be delimited.
7639
7640*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7641bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7642bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7643
7644*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7645field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7646prefixed with `ALT'.
7647
7648*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7649bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7650formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7651documentation).
7652
7653*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7654documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7655for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7656
7657*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7658comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7659
7660*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7661alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7662signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7663
7664*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7665
7666*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7667
7668*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7669from alien sources.
7670
7671*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7672to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7673crossref entries.
7674
7675*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7676region.
7677
7678*** Added support for imenu.
7679
7680*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7681of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7682`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7683`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7684
7685*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7686from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7687
7688** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7689
7690** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7691
7692** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7693functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7694Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7695as an argument.
7696
7697When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7698and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7699
7700** browse-url changes
7701
7702*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7703Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7704(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7705non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7706customization variables.
7707
7708*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7709
7710*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7711lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7712(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7713
7714** Changes in Ediff
7715
7716*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7717pops up the Info file for this command.
7718
7719*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7720the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7721merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7722directories).
7723
7724*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7725and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7726files in the same directory.
7727
7728*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7729The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7730related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7731
7732** Changes in Viper
7733
7734*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7735*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7736 instead of vip-.
7737*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7738*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7739Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7740*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7741*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7742*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7743color when Viper is in insert state.
7744*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7745Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7746viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7747
7748** Etags changes.
7749
7750*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7751default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7752Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7753variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7754not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7755
7756*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7757
7758*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7759constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7760
7761*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7762recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7763In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7764
7765*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7766C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7767recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7768methods and protocols.
7769
7770*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7771.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7772column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7773paragraph name.
7774
7775*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7776an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7777at least M times and as many as N times.
7778
7779** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7780in files has changed slightly.
7781
7782With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7783time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7784This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7785with old time-stamp-format values.
7786
7787In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7788(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7789This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7790reasons.
7791
7792In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7793natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7794fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7795(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7796time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7797specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7798
7799Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7800case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7801truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7802
7803The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7804being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7805future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7806recommended now will continue to work then.
7807
7808See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7809details.
7810
7811** There are some additional major modes:
7812
7813dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7814m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7815meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7816
7817** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7818copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7819into Emacs.
7820
7821** New Lisp packages include:
7822
7823*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7824
7825*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7826be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7827
7828*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7829
7830*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7831in shell buffers.
7832
7833*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7834See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7835and `elint-defun'.
7836
7837*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7838meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7839ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7840strings or comments.
7841
7842These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7843abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7844you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7845insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7846at these points.
7847
7848*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7849can visit them by short forms of their names.
7850
7851*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7852Emacs Lisp function at point.
7853
7854*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7855
7856*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7857switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7858
7859*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7860
7861*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7862
7863*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7864
7865*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7866from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7867
7868*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7869You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7870inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7871original place after inserting the copy.
7872
7873*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7874on the buffer.
7875
7876You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7877velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7878(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7879
7880Enable mouse-drag with:
7881 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7882-or-
7883 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7884
7885*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7886mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7887
7888*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7889It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7890
7891*** ogonek
7892
7893The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7894Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7895platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7896TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7897ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7898prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7899instance) and vice versa.
7900
7901To use this package load it using
7902 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7903Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7904 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7905 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7906The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7907ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7908
7909*** Interface to ph.
7910
7911Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7912
7913The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7914services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7915these servers.
7916
7917*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7918
7919*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7920You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7921while the real cursor does not move.
7922
7923*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7924for visiting your favorite web sites.
7925
7926*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7927so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7928
7929** movemail change
7930
7931Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7932mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7933supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7934user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7935
7936This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
05197f40 7937\f
3787e12e
GM
7938* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7939
7940** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7941
7942Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7943end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7944Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7945file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7946file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7947
7948To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7949C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7950coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7951specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7952LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7953save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
05197f40 7954\f
3787e12e
GM
7955* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7956
7957** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7958Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7959vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7960Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7961
7962** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7963to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7964
7965In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7966don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7967"win".
7968
7969** Basic Lisp changes
7970
7971*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7972evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7973
7974*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7975be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7976or by the user.
7977
7978The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7979
7980*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7981
7982(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7983(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7984
7985*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7986usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7987its argument.
7988
7989*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7990
7991*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7992
7993*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7994
7995*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7996error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7997include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7998`format' function.
7999
8000*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
8001or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
8002whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
8003
8004*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
8005either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
8006adding one of these suffixes.
8007
8008*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
8009which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
8010If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
8011
8012We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
8013because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
8014
8015*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
8016
8017*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
8018You must load the `cl' library to define it.
8019
8020*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
8021conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
8022
8023 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
8024
8025BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
8026BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
8027
8028*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
8029choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
8030restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
8031works using `save-current-buffer'.
8032
8033*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
8034write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
8035of the last form.
8036
8037*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
8038which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
8039last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
8040as the last form.
8041
8042*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
8043characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
8044matches.
8045
8046For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
8047
8048*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
8049with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
8050Then it returns that string.
8051
8052For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
8053
8054(with-output-to-string
8055 (princ "The buffer is ")
8056 (princ (buffer-name)))
8057
8058returns "The buffer is foo".
8059
8060** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
8061is non-nil.
8062
8063These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
8064buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
8065characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
8066
8067*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
8068a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
8069
8070Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
8071character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
8072Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
8073position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
8074characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
8075 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
8076
8077ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
8078Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
8079non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
8080characters".
8081
8082The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
8083through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
8084"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
8085range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
8086leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
8087
8088*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
8089(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
8090multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
8091character, which may be more than one buffer position.
8092
8093This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
8094always one buffer position, need to be changed.
8095
8096However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
8097
8098*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
8099because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
8100have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
8101the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
8102guaranteed.
8103
8104*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
8105between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
8106character).
8107
8108When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
8109
8110 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
8111 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
8112 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
8113 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
8114 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
8115
8116*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
8117
8118*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
8119`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8120more than the number of characters.
8121
8122You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8123it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8124\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8125is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8126follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8127newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8128
8129*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8130and returns a string containing those characters.
8131
8132*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8133(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8134counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8135character, sref signals an error.
8136
8137*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8138in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8139string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8140
8141*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8142in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8143region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8144
8145*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8146the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8147to a vector of the characters in it.
8148
8149*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8150of a string. You call it as follows:
8151
8152 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8153
8154This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8155STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8156This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8157Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8158it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8159
8160*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8161if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8162
8163*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8164if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8165
8166*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8167to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8168not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8169which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8170
8171(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8172
8173This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8174
8175The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8176If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8177are not included in the resulting value.
8178
8179The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8180at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8181WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8182is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8183
8184If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8185place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8186character extends across that column), then the padding character
8187PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8188string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8189column START-COLUMN.
8190
8191*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8192the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8193necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8194difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8195changed text, before the change.
8196
8197*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8198sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8199one character set for each script, not for each language.
8200
8201**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8202
8203**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8204
8205**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8206set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8207
8208**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8209name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8210which identify the character within that character set.
8211
8212**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8213byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8214opposite of split-char.
8215
8216**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8217of all the characters between BEG and END.
8218
8219**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8220of all the characters in a string.
8221
8222*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8223and specifying coding systems.
8224
8225**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8226system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8227of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8228(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8229and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8230as what to do about code conversion.)
8231
8232**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8233name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8234
8235**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8236for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8237except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8238
8239Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8240which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8241to match against a file name.
8242
8243VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8244a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8245decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8246to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8247systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8248specifies the coding system for encoding.
8249
8250If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8251or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8252
8253**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8254the coding system to use for network sockets.
8255
8256Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8257which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8258either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8259service names.
8260
8261VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8262a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8263decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8264to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8265systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8266specifies the coding system for encoding.
8267
8268If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8269or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8270
8271**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8272for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8273except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8274start the subprocess.
8275
8276**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8277systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8278when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8279(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8280to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8281
8282**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8283coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8284subprocess.
8285
8286It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8287but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8288start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8289connection permanently or until overridden.
8290
8291The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8292file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8293network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8294coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8295It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8296system for one operation at a time.
8297
8298**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8299files, subprocesses or network connections.
8300
8301**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8302coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8303The value is a cons cell,
8304 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8305where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8306the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8307input to the subprocess.
8308
8309**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8310change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8311
8312** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8313customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8314you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8315
8316You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8317variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8318information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8319legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8320customization.
8321
8322Thus, instead of writing
8323
8324 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8325 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8326
8327you would now write this:
8328
8329 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8330 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8331 :type 'boolean
8332 :group foo)
8333
8334The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8335two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8336describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8337for a description of them.
8338
8339The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8340should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8341
8342 (defgroup ispell nil
8343 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8344 :group 'processes)
8345
8346The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8347group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8348but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8349to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8350second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8351
8352Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8353package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8354have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8355package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8356first-level subgroups.
8357
8358** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8359
8360This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8361separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8362
8363** easy-mmode
8364
8365The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8366developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8367only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8368predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8369`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8370`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8371
8372** Text property changes
8373
8374*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8375text property.
8376
8377*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8378previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8379place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8380functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8381starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8382
8383If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8384LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8385of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8386position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8387
8388*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8389value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8390is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8391
8392** Changes in invisibility features
8393
8394*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8395hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8396is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8397should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8398would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8399make the overlay visible.
8400
8401During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8402invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8403needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8404which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8405the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8406t when it should hide it.
8407
8408*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8409
8410Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8411invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8412and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8413Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8414manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8415Here is an example of how to do this:
8416
8417 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8418 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8419 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8420 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8421
8422 ...
8423 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8424
8425 ...
8426 ;; When done with the overlays:
8427 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8428 ;; Or respectively:
8429 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8430
8431** Changes in syntax parsing.
8432
8433*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8434`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8435obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8436`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8437
8438If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8439is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8440used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8441
8442When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8443character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8444
8445 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8446 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8447
8448 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8449 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8450 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8451
8452 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8453 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8454 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8455 determine the syntax type of the character.
8456
8457 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8458 of the current buffer.
8459
8460*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8461value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8462for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8463
8464*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8465and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8466only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8467character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8468another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8469
8470These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8471text property.
8472
8473*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8474arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8475of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8476
8477*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8478(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8479element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8480nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8481string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8482
8483*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8484syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8485`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8486
8487** Changes in face features
8488
8489*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8490if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8491
8492*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8493of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8494
8495*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8496set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8497
8498*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8499set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8500
8501*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8502by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8503and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8504the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8505overlay property).
8506
8507This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8508arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8509
8510** Changes in file-handling functions
8511
8512*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8513directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8514they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8515is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8516
8517This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8518begins with ~.
8519
8520*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8521it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8522
8523*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8524the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8525
8526*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8527as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8528
8529*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8530character code conversion as well as other things.
8531
8532Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8533(formerly it did not).
8534
8535*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8536environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8537
8538*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8539instead of constant strings.
8540
8541*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8542to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8543any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8544
8545substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8546in the same way as before.
8547
8548*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8549The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8550which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8551
8552*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8553error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8554else, and returns nil.
8555
8556*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8557directory cannot be listed.
8558
8559** Changes in minibuffer input
8560
8561*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8562read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8563additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8564argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8565ways:
8566
8567 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8568 It is available through the history command M-n.
8569
8570*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8571read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8572argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8573minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8574enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8575
8576In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8577argument in this way.
8578
8579*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8580from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8581minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8582
8583** Echo area features
8584
8585*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8586echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8587minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8588after the echo area is cleared.
8589
8590*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8591in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8592
8593** Keyboard input features
8594
8595*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8596set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8597
8598*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8599received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8600by keyboard macros.
8601
8602** Frame-related changes
8603
8604*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8605creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8606hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8607
8608*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8609the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8610has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8611
8612*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8613selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8614value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8615in the selected frame.
8616
8617*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8618is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8619which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8620
8621** X Windows features
8622
8623*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8624x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8625x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8626
8627*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8628The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8629
8630*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8631MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8632A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8633
8634If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8635it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8636
8637** Subprocess features
8638
8639*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8640functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8641automatically.
8642
8643*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8644and returns the output from the command as a string.
8645
8646*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8647and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8648
8649** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8650does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8651
8652** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8653at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8654goes after the other menu items.
8655
8656** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8657of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8658around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8659are in use.
8660
8661The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8662series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8663
8664Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8665after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8666form.
8667
8668** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8669is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8670but its hook is still run.
8671
8672** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8673for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8674
8675If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8676regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8677useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8678
8679This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8680are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8681filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8682warned.
8683
8684** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8685way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8686
8687** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8688integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8689functions like display-time.
8690
8691** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8692name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8693
8694** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8695can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8696is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8697
8698** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8699if there is an error in compilation.
8700
8701** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8702switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8703argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8704they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8705
8706** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8707Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8708the *scratch* buffer.
8709
8710** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8711The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8712where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8713e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8714
8715** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8716and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8717It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8718
8719** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8720using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8721variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8722and compose-mail-other-frame.
8723
8724** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8725can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8726full name of the specified user will be returned.
8727
8728** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8729of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8730where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8731in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8732option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8733files at all.
8734
8735** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8736and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8737width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8738the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8739
8740For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8741minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8742with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8743is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8744
8745** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8746
8747** imenu.el changes.
8748
8749You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8750item from menu created by imenu.
8751
8752An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8753#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8754select one of those items.
05197f40 8755\f
3787e12e 8756* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8757
8758----------------------------------------------------------------------
8759Copyright information:
8760
75d80cc6 8761Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8762
8763 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8764 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8765 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8766 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8767
8768 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8769 of this document, or of portions of it,
8770 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8771 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
05197f40 8772\f
a933dad1
DL
8773Local variables:
8774mode: outline
8775paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8776end: